Table of Contents
- Before Use
- Basic Guide
- Advanced Guide
- 1 Camera Basics
- 2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
- 3 Other Shooting Modes
- Shooting with Your Favorite Settings (Creative Assist)
- Specific Scenes
- Image Effects (Creative Filters)
- Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (High Dynamic Range)
- Adding Artistic Effects
- Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect)
- Shooting Oil Painting-like Photos (Art bold Effect)
- Shooting Watercolor-like Photos (Water Painting Effect)
- Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect)
- Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time (for One-Minute Clips)
- Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect)
- Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect
- Shooting in Monochrome (Grainy B/W)
- Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (High Dynamic Range)
- Shooting Movies in Movie Mode
- 4 P Mode
- Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)
- Adjusting Shooting Functions from a Single Screen
- Image Brightness (Exposure)
- Image Colors
- Shooting Range and Focusing
- Flash
- Other Settings
- 5 Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
- 6 Playback Mode
- 7 Wi-Fi Functions
- Available Wi-Fi Features
- Importing Images into a Smartphone
- Sending Images to a Registered Web Service
- Viewing Images Using a Media Player
- Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer
- Sending Images to Another Camera
- Image Sending Options
- Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync)
- Shooting Remotely
- Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings
- 8 Setting Menu
- Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
- Date-Based Image Storage
- File Numbering
- Formatting Memory Cards
- Changing Video Formats
- Electronic Level Calibration
- Using Eco Mode
- Power-Saving Adjustment
- Screen Brightness
- World Clock
- Date and Time
- Display Language
- Silencing Camera Operations
- Hiding Hints and Tips
- Changing Touch Screen Settings
- Cleaning the Image Sensor
- Checking Certification Logos
- Adjusting Other Settings
- Restoring Defaults
- Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
- 9 Accessories
- System Map
- Optional Accessories
- Using Optional Accessories
- Using the Software
- Printing Images
- 10 Appendix
- Troubleshooting
- On-screen Messages
- On-screen Information
- Functions and Menu Tables
- Handling Precautions
- Specifications
- Type
- Image Sensor
- Recording System
- Image Processing during Shooting
- Autofocus
- Exposure Control
- Shutter
- Flash
- Drive, Self-timer System
- Still Photo Shooting
- Movie Shooting Settings
- LCD Monitor
- Playback
- Post-processing of Images
- Direct Printing
- Custom Functions
- Interface
- Wi-Fi
- Network Functions
- Power Supplies
- Dimensions and Weight
- Operation Environment
- Number of Shots per Memory Card
- Recording Time per Memory Card
- Internal Flash Range Guide
- Battery Pack LP-E17
- Battery Charger LC-E17/LC-E17E
- Type
- Index
- Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions
Canon M3 + EF-M 15-45mm User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for M3 + EF-M 15-45mm by Canon which is a product in the Digital Cameras category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
1
ENGLISH
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
© CANON INC. 2014 CDD-E593-030
●Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety Precautions”
(=
13) section, before using the camera.
●Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly.
●Store this guide so that you can conveniently access it in the future.
●Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.
: Next page
: Previous page
: Return to the page you were viewing when you clicked a link.
●To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at right.
Camera User Guide
2
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Initial Information
Package Contents
Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package.
If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer.
Camera
(with body cap)
Battery Pack
LP-E17
(with terminal cover)
Battery Charger
LC-E17/LC-E17E
Neck Strap
EM-200DB
Interface Cable
IFC-400PCU
●Printed matter is also included.
●Check that the contents of the lens kit are included in the camera’s
package.
●A memory card is not included.
Before Use
Compatible Memory Cards
The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of
capacity.
●SD memory cards*1
●SDHC memory cards *1*2
●SDXC memory cards*1*2
*1 Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been
veried to work with the camera.
*2 UHS-I memory cards are also supported.
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information
●Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images
were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries
and afliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential
damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,
including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be
recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable.
●Images recorded by the camera shall be for personal use. Refrain
from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note
that even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright
or other legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some
commercial settings.
●The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of
camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before
contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
●Although the LCD monitor is produced under extremely high-precision
manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the pixels meet
design specications, in rare cases some pixels may be defective
or may appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate camera
damage or affect recorded images.
●The LCD monitor may be covered with a thin plastic lm for protection
against scratches during shipment. If covered, remove the lm before
using the camera.
●When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become
warm. This is not a malfunction.
3
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
(1) LCD monitor / Touch screen*
(2) Focal plane mark
(3) Hot shoe
(4) Flash sync contacts
(5) Indicator
(6) Speaker
(7) Movie button
(8) [ (Playback)] button
(9) Strap mount
(10) HDMITM terminal
(11) [ (AE lock)] / [ (Index)]
button
(12) [ (AF Frame adjustment)] /
[ (Magnify)] button
(13) [ (Menu)] button
(14) [ (Information)] button
(15) [ (ISO speed)] / [ (Wi-Fi)] /
Up button
(16) [ (Manual focus)] / Left button
(17) Control dial
(18) [ (Quick setting menu)] / Set
button
(19) [ (Flash)] / Right button
(20) [ (Erase)] / Down button
* Touch may not be detected as easily if you apply a screen protector.
●Turning the control dial is one way to
choose setting items, switch images, and
perform other operations. Most of these
operations are also possible with the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
Part Names
(1) [ (Multifunction)] button
(2) Front dial
(3) Remote control sensor
(4) EF-M lens mount index
(5) Grip
(6) Contacts
(7) Exposure compensation dial
(8) Shutter button
(9) Power button
(10) Mode dial
(11) Flash
(12) Microphone
(13) Strap mount
(14) [ (Flash pop-up)] switch
(15) Lamp
(16) Lens lock pin
(17) Terminal cover
(18) Wi-Fi antenna area
(19) Lens release button
(20) Lens mount
(21) External microphone IN terminal
(22) Digital terminal
(23) (N-Mark)*
(24) Tripod socket
(25) DC coupler terminal cover
(26) Memory card slot / Battery pack
compartment cover
* Used with NFC features (=
118).
4
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Conventions Used in this Guide
●In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.
●The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
●Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in
brackets.
●: Important information you should know
●: Notes and tips for expert camera use
●: Indicates touch-screen operations
●=
xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents
a page number)
●Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.
●All lenses and mount adapters are referred to simply as “lenses” and
“mount adapters”, regardless of whether they are included in the lens
kit or sold separately.
●Illustrations in this manual show the camera with lens EF-M 18-55mm
f/3.5-5.6 IS STM attached.
●For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
the “memory card”.
●The symbols “ Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate
how the function is used — whether for still images or movies.
Lens
EF-M Lens
(Lens with no focus mode switch or image stabilizer switch)
(1) Focusing ring
(2) Hood mount
(3) Filter-mounting thread (front of lens)
(4) Lens mount index
(5) Zoom ring
(6) Zoom position index
(7) Contacts
5
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Table of Contents
Before Use
Initial Information .............................................................. 2
Package Contents .................................................................... 2
Compatible Memory Cards....................................................... 2
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information ................................. 2
Part Names .............................................................................. 3
Lens .........................................................................................4
Conventions Used in this Guide ............................................... 4
Common Camera Operations ................................................ 12
Safety Precautions ................................................................. 13
Basic Guide
Basic Operations............................................................. 16
Initial Preparations.................................................................. 16
Attaching the Strap .................................................................... 16
Charging the Battery Pack .........................................................16
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card ............................17
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card .....................18
Setting the Date and Time ......................................................... 18
Changing the Date and Time .................................................19
Display Language ...................................................................... 20
Attaching a Lens ........................................................................ 20
Detaching a Lens ..................................................................21
Lens Instruction Manual ........................................................21
Attaching EF and EF-S Lenses .................................................21
Detaching a Lens ..................................................................22
Using a Tripod .......................................................................22
Stabilizing the Image .............................................................22
Trying the Camera Out ........................................................... 23
Holding the Camera ...................................................................23
Shooting in Scene Intelligent Auto Mode ...................................23
Viewing ......................................................................................25
Erasing Images .....................................................................26
Advanced Guide
1 Camera Basics ........................................................... 27
On/Off ..................................................................................... 27
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) ............................. 28
Power Saving in Shooting Mode ...........................................28
Power Saving in Playback Mode ........................................... 28
Shutter Button ........................................................................ 28
Shooting Modes ..................................................................... 29
Adjusting the Angle of the LCD Monitor ................................. 29
Tilting the Screen Downward ................................................. 29
Tilting the Screen Upward .....................................................29
Shooting Display Options ....................................................... 30
Using the Quick Setting Menu ................................................ 31
Using Touch-Screen Operations to Congure Settings .............31
Using the Menu Screen .......................................................... 32
Touch-Screen Operations .......................................................... 33
On-Screen Keyboard.............................................................. 33
Indicator Display ..................................................................... 34
2 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ................................ 35
Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings .......................... 35
Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) ..............................................35
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode ................................................... 37
Digest Movie Playback ..........................................................37
Still Images/Movies ...............................................................37
6
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Adding Artistic Effects ............................................................ 53
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect) ............ 54
Shooting Oil Painting-like Photos (Art bold Effect) ....................54
Shooting Watercolor-like Photos (Water Painting Effect) ..........54
Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect) .............55
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips) ...........................................................55
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect) ...........56
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect ..............................................56
Shooting in Monochrome (Grainy B/W) ..................................... 57
Shooting Movies in Movie Mode ............................................ 57
Shooting Still Images during Movie Recording ..........................58
Locking or Changing Image Brightness .....................................58
Sound Settings ..........................................................................59
Adjusting the Recording Volume ...........................................59
Turning Off the Wind Filter ....................................................59
Using the Attenuator .............................................................. 59
4 P Mode ........................................................................ 60
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode) ....................................... 60
Adjusting Shooting Functions from a Single Screen .............. 61
Image Brightness (Exposure) ................................................. 61
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation) ............ 61
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock) ......................61
Changing the Metering Method .................................................62
Changing the ISO Speed ...........................................................62
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings ..................................................63
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting) ...............................63
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast
(Auto Lighting Optimizer) ........................................................... 64
Shooting Bright Subjects (Highlight Tone Priority) ..................... 64
Image Colors .......................................................................... 65
Still Images ............................................................................ 38
Movies ...................................................................................38
Scene Icons ............................................................................... 39
On-Screen Frames ....................................................................40
Common, Convenient Features ............................................. 40
Using the Self-Timer .................................................................. 40
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake .......................41
Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch Shutter) ....................41
Continuous Shooting .................................................................42
Image Customization Features .............................................. 43
Changing Image Quality ............................................................ 43
Saving RAW Images .............................................................43
Using the Menu .....................................................................44
Changing the Aspect Ratio ........................................................ 45
Changing Movie Image Quality .................................................45
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level ...................................... 46
Customizing Camera Operation ............................................. 47
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from Lighting Up ......47
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots ........................47
3 Other Shooting Modes .............................................. 48
Shooting with Your Favorite Settings (Creative Assist) .......... 48
Saving/Loading Settings ............................................................ 49
Saving Settings .....................................................................49
Loading ..................................................................................50
Using Screen Settings ........................................................... 50
Playing Back Images ................................................................. 50
[] Mode and Creative Zone Settings .................................50
Specic Scenes ...................................................................... 51
Taking Vivid Pictures of Food (Food) .........................................52
Image Effects (Creative Filters) .............................................. 52
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (High Dynamic Range) ...........53
7
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Lens Peripheral Illumination/
Chromatic Aberration Correction ...............................................79
Changing the Noise Reduction Level ........................................80
Using Multi Shot Noise Reduction ......................................... 80
Reducing Noise at Slow Shutter Speeds ...................................81
5 Tv, Av, M, and C Modes ............................................. 82
Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)...................................... 82
Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode) ..................................... 83
Depth-of-Field Preview ..............................................................83
Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode) ..... 84
Long (Bulb) Exposures ........................................................... 85
Adjusting the Flash Output ..................................................... 85
Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values ........................ 86
Customizing Controls and Display ......................................... 87
Customizing Display Information ............................................... 87
Customizing Displayed Data .................................................87
Setting Up Advanced Camera Functions ...................................88
Adding Functions to Buttons and Dials .................................89
Saving Shooting Settings ([C] Mode) ........................................90
Settings that can be saved ....................................................90
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items (My Menu) .......91
6 Playback Mode .......................................................... 93
Viewing ................................................................................... 93
Touch-Screen Operations .......................................................... 94
Switching Display Modes ...........................................................95
Dening Displayed Shooting Data .........................................95
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights) ...................... 96
Brightness Histogram ............................................................96
RGB Histogram .....................................................................96
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images
(Digest Movies) ..........................................................................96
Adjusting White Balance ............................................................65
Custom White Balance .......................................................... 65
Manually Correcting White Balance ......................................66
Using Your Favorite Shades (Picture Style) ..............................67
Adjusting Picture Styles .........................................................68
Saving Customized Picture Styles ........................................69
Shooting Range and Focusing ............................................... 69
Selecting the AF Method ...........................................................69
1-Point AF ..............................................................................69
+Tracking ............................................................................70
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF) ..............................71
Shooting with the AF Lock ......................................................... 71
Shooting with Servo AF .............................................................72
Changing the Focus Setting ......................................................73
Fine-tuning Focus ...................................................................... 73
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode ............................................... 74
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking) ....................74
Flash....................................................................................... 75
Changing the Flash Mode .........................................................75
Auto .......................................................................................75
On ..........................................................................................75
Slow Synchro ........................................................................75
Off .......................................................................................... 75
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation ............................76
Shooting with the FE Lock ......................................................... 76
Changing the Flash Timing ........................................................77
Changing the Flash Metering Mode ..........................................77
Resetting Flash Settings ............................................................77
Other Settings ........................................................................ 78
Changing the IS Mode Settings ................................................. 78
Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting .....................................................................78
8
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Applying Filter Effects .............................................................. 111
Correcting Red-Eye ................................................................. 112
Editing Movies .......................................................................113
Reducing File Sizes ................................................................. 114
Editing Digest Movies .............................................................. 114
7 Wi-Fi Functions........................................................ 115
Available Wi-Fi Features .......................................................115
Importing Images into a Smartphone ....................................116
Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone ............. 116
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off
or in Shooting Mode ............................................................ 116
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode ... 117
Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu .......................... 118
Using Another Access Point .................................................... 119
Conrming Access Point Compatibility ................................ 120
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points ...............................120
Connecting to Listed Access Points ....................................121
Previous Access Points .......................................................122
Sending Images to a Registered Web Service ..................... 122
Registering Web Services .......................................................122
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY ..............................123
Registering Other Web Services .........................................124
Uploading Images to Web Services ........................................125
Viewing Images Using a Media Player ................................. 126
Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer .......... 127
Sending Images to Another Camera .................................... 129
Image Sending Options ........................................................ 130
Sending Multiple Images .........................................................130
Notes on Sending Images .......................................................130
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size) ........131
Adding Comments ................................................................... 131
Viewing by Date .....................................................................97
Browsing and Filtering Images ............................................... 97
Navigating through Images in an Index ..................................... 97
Touch-Screen Operations ......................................................98
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions .........................98
Using the Front Dial to Jump between Images ..........................99
Touch-Screen Operations ....................................................100
Image Viewing Options ........................................................ 100
Magnifying Images ..................................................................100
Touch-Screen Operations ....................................................101
Viewing Slideshows ................................................................. 101
Protecting Images ................................................................ 102
Using the Menu .......................................................................102
Choosing Images Individually ..............................................103
Selecting a Range ...............................................................103
Protecting All Images at Once .............................................104
Clearing All Protection at Once ...........................................104
Erasing Images .................................................................... 105
Erasing Multiple Images at Once .............................................105
Choosing a Selection Method .............................................105
Choosing Images Individually ..............................................105
Selecting a Range ...............................................................106
Specifying All Images at Once .............................................106
Rotating Images ................................................................... 107
Using the Menu .......................................................................107
Deactivating Auto Rotation ......................................................108
Applying Ratings .................................................................. 108
Using the Menu .......................................................................108
Editing Still Images ............................................................... 109
Resizing Images ......................................................................109
Using the Menu ................................................................... 110
Cropping .................................................................................. 110
9
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Activating the Cleaner .........................................................143
Cleaning Manually ............................................................... 143
Checking Certication Logos ................................................... 144
Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images .................144
Deleting All Copyright Information .......................................144
Adjusting Other Settings .......................................................... 145
Restoring Defaults ................................................................... 145
9 Accessories ............................................................. 146
System Map ......................................................................... 147
Optional Accessories ............................................................ 148
Lens ......................................................................................... 148
Power Supplies ........................................................................148
Flash ........................................................................................ 149
Other Accessories ...................................................................149
Printers ....................................................................................150
Using Optional Accessories.................................................. 150
Playback on a TV ....................................................................150
Powering the Camera with Household Power ......................... 151
Remote Control Shooting ........................................................152
Using the Hot Shoe .................................................................152
Using Electronic Viewnders (Sold Separately) ......................153
Using an External Flash (Sold Separately) ..............................154
Setting External Flash Functions .........................................155
Setting External Flash Custom Functions ...........................156
Resetting External Flash Functions .....................................157
Using External Microphones ....................................................157
Using the Software ............................................................... 158
Software ..................................................................................158
Software Instruction Manual ................................................ 158
Checking Your Computer Environment ...................................158
Installing the Software .............................................................158
Saving Images to a Computer ................................................. 159
Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync) ....................... 131
Initial Preparations ................................................................... 131
Preparing the Camera .........................................................131
Preparing the Computer ......................................................132
Sending Images .......................................................................132
Shooting Remotely ............................................................... 133
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings.......................................... 134
Editing Connection Information ...............................................134
Changing a Device Nickname .............................................134
Erasing Connection Information ..........................................135
Specifying Images to Share with Smartphones ...................135
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default ...................................136
8 Setting Menu ............................................................ 137
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions ...................................... 137
Date-Based Image Storage ..................................................... 137
File Numbering ........................................................................137
Formatting Memory Cards ....................................................... 138
Low-Level Formatting .......................................................... 138
Changing Video Formats ......................................................... 139
Electronic Level Calibration ..................................................... 139
Resetting the Electronic Level ............................................. 139
Using Eco Mode ......................................................................139
Power-Saving Adjustment .......................................................140
Screen Brightness ...................................................................140
World Clock .............................................................................141
Date and Time .........................................................................141
Display Language .................................................................... 141
Silencing Camera Operations ..................................................142
Hiding Hints and Tips ...............................................................142
Changing Touch Screen Settings ............................................142
Cleaning the Image Sensor ..................................................... 142
Turning Auto Cleaning Off ...................................................142
10
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Info Display 6 .......................................................................176
Summary of Movie Control Panel ........................................176
Functions and Menu Tables ................................................. 177
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode ...........................177
Quick Settings .........................................................................179
Shooting Tabs .......................................................................... 181
C.Fn Tab ..................................................................................186
INFO. Quick Control ................................................................187
Set Up Tab ............................................................................... 187
My Menu Tab ...........................................................................188
Playback Tab ...........................................................................188
Playback Mode Quick Settings ................................................ 188
Handling Precautions ........................................................... 189
Specications ....................................................................... 190
Type .....................................................................................190
Image Sensor ......................................................................190
Recording System ...............................................................190
Image Processing during Shooting .....................................191
Autofocus ............................................................................191
Exposure Control .................................................................191
Shutter ................................................................................. 192
Flash ....................................................................................192
Drive, Self-timer System ......................................................192
Still Photo Shooting .............................................................192
Movie Shooting Settings ......................................................192
LCD Monitor ........................................................................193
Playback .............................................................................. 193
Post-processing of Images .................................................. 193
Direct Printing ...................................................................... 194
Custom Functions ...............................................................194
Interface ..............................................................................194
Wi-Fi ....................................................................................194
Printing Images .................................................................... 160
Easy Print ................................................................................160
Conguring Print Settings ........................................................ 161
Cropping Images before Printing .........................................162
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing ...............162
Available Layout Options ..................................................... 163
Printing ID Photos ...............................................................163
Printing Movie Scenes ............................................................. 163
Movie Printing Options ........................................................163
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF) ..................................164
Conguring Print Settings ....................................................164
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images ............................165
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images .......................... 165
Setting Up Printing for All Images ........................................165
Clearing All Images from the Print List ................................165
Adding Images to a Photobook ...............................................166
Choosing a Selection Method .............................................166
Adding Images Individually ..................................................166
Adding All Images to a Photobook ......................................166
Removing All Images from a Photobook .............................167
10
Appendix .................................................................. 168
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 168
On-screen Messages ........................................................... 172
On-screen Information.......................................................... 174
During Shooting ....................................................................... 174
Battery Level .......................................................................174
Playback ..................................................................................175
Info Display 1 .......................................................................175
Info Display 2 .......................................................................175
Info Display 3 .......................................................................175
Info Display 4 .......................................................................175
Info Display 5 .......................................................................176
11
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Network Functions ...............................................................194
Power Supplies ...................................................................195
Dimensions and Weight .......................................................195
Operation Environment .......................................................195
Number of Shots per Memory Card ....................................195
Recording Time per Memory Card ......................................196
Internal Flash Range Guide ................................................196
Battery Pack LP-E17 ...........................................................196
Battery Charger LC-E17/LC-E17E ......................................197
Index..................................................................................... 198
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions ........................................ 200
Radio Wave Interference Precautions ..................................... 200
Security Precautions ................................................................200
Trademarks and Licensing ..................................................201
Disclaimer ............................................................................201
12
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Common Camera Operations
Shoot
●Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)
- =
35, =
37
●Use the effects of your choice (Creative Assist)
- =
48
●Blur the background; keep the background in sharp focus (Av Mode)
- =
83
●Freeze movement; blur movement (Tv Mode)
- =
82
●Add effects to photos (Creative Filters)
- =
52
●Shoot continuously (Continuous Shooting)
- =
42
●Shoot in locations where ash is prohibited (Flash Off)
- =
36
●Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)
- =
40
View
●View images (Playback Mode)
- =
93
●Automatic playback (Slideshow)
- =
101
●On a TV
- =
150
●On a computer
- =
158
●Browse through images quickly
- =
97
●Erase images
- =
105
Shoot/View Movies
●Shoot movies
- =
35, =
57
●View movies (Playback Mode)
- =
93
Print
●Print pictures
- =
160
Save
●Save images to a computer via a cable
- =
159
Use Wi-Fi Functions
●Send images to a smartphone
- =
116
●Share images online
- =
122
●Send images to a computer
- =
131
13
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
This could result in electrical shock or re.
If the product gets wet, or if liquid or foreign objects get inside, remove the
battery pack/batteries or unplug immediately.
●Do not look through the viewnder or interchangeable lens (depending
on which your product has) at intense light sources, such as the sun
on a clear day or an intense articial light source.
This could damage your eyesight.
●If your product uses an interchangeable lens, do not leave the lens or
camera with the lens attached out in the sun without the lens cap on.
This could result in re.
●Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged in.
This could result in electrical shock or re. Immediately stop using the
product and distance yourself from it.
●Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.
●Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct ame.
This may cause the battery pack/batteries to explode or leak, resulting in
electrical shock, re, or injuries. If leaking battery electrolyte comes into
contact with eyes, mouth, skin, or clothing, immediately ush with water.
●If the product uses a battery charger, note the following precautions.
- Remove the plug periodically and, using a dry cloth, wipe away any
dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power
outlet, and the surrounding area.
- Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands.
- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated
capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if
the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the outlet.
- Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact
the terminals or plug.
- Do not cut, damage, alter, or place heavy items on the power cord, if
your product uses one.
This could result in electrical shock or re.
Safety Precautions
●Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety precautions
described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly.
●The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and
other persons from being injured or incurring property damage.
●Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold
accessories you use.
Warning
Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.
●Do not trigger the ash in close proximity to people’s eyes.
This may damage eyesight. In particular, remain at least 1 meter (3.3 feet)
away from infants when using the ash.
●Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.
A strap wound around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
If your product uses a power cord, the cord becoming wound around a
child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
The hot shoe cap is dangerous if swallowed. If swallowed, contact a
doctor immediately.
●Use only recommended power sources.
●Do not disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product.
●Do not peel off the label, if the battery pack has one.
●Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.
●Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken, such as when
dropped.
●Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a strange
smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.
●Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to
clean the product.
●Avoid contact with liquid, and do not allow liquid or foreign objects
inside.
14
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
●When using optional lenses, lens lters, or lter adapters (if
applicable), be sure to attach these accessories rmly.
If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the
shards of glass may lead to cuts.
●On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, make sure to
avoid pinching your ngers with the lowering ash.
This could result in injury.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of property damage.
●Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a
clear day or an intense articial light source.
Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components.
●When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be
careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.
●On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, do not push
the ash down or pry it open.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
●Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the ash with a
cotton swab or cloth.
The heat emitted from the ash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the
product to malfunction.
●Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using
the product.
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.
●Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with
tape or other insulators.
Contacting other metal materials may lead to re or explosions.
●Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use. Do
not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to
overheat and distort, resulting in re.
●Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.
The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the
operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate
caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices
is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.
●Do not allow the camera to maintain contact with skin for extended
periods.
Even if the camera does not feel hot, this may cause low-temperature
burns, manifested in redness of the skin or blistering. Use a tripod in hot
places, or if you have poor circulation or insensitive skin.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of injury.
●When carrying the product by the strap, be careful not to bang it,
subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other
objects.
●Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.
This could lead to injury or damage the camera.
●Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts.
If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.
●When using the ash, be careful not to cover it with your ngers or
clothing.
This could result in burns or damage to the ash.
●Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places:
- Places subject to direct sunlight
- Places subject to temperatures above 40°C (104°F)
- Humid or dusty places
These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion of the battery
pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, re, burns, or other injuries.
Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock, re, burns, or
other injuries.
●The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed
for prolonged periods.
15
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
●Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or
explosion, resulting in product damage or re.
●If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that
have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and
new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and –
terminals reversed.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
●Do not sit down with the camera in your pant pocket.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
●When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not
come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it
faces the body), if your product’s screen closes.
●Do not attach any hard objects to the product.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
16
Basic Guide
Before Use
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Initial Preparations
Prepare for shooting as follows.
Attaching the Strap
●Attach the included strap to the camera
as shown.
●On the other side of the camera, attach
the strap the same way.
Charging the Battery Pack
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the
battery pack charged.
1 Insert the battery pack.
●Remove the cover from the battery pack,
align the marks on the battery pack
and charger, and insert the battery pack
by pushing it in (1) and down (2).
2 Charge the battery pack.
●LC-E17: Flip out the plug (1), and plug
the charger into a power outlet (2).
LC-E17
Basic Operations
Basic information and instructions, from initial preparations to shooting
and playback
Basic Guide
17
Basic Guide
Before Use
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
●For details on charging time, see “Battery Charger LC-E17/
LC-E17E” (=
197). For details on the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
“Power Supplies” (=
195).
●Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
●As a visual reminder of the charge status, attach the battery cover
with visible on a charged battery pack and concealed on an
uncharged one.
●The charger can be used in regions with 100–240 V AC
power (50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use
a commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).
Note that before using a new memory card (or a memory card formatted
in another device), you should format the memory card with this camera
(=
138).
1 Open the cover.
●Slide the cover (1) and open it (2).
2 Insert the battery pack.
●Holding the battery pack with the
terminals (1) facing as shown, move the
battery lock down (2) and insert until the
lock clicks shut.
●If you insert the battery pack facing the
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the
correct position. Always conrm that the
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted.
●LC-E17E: Plug the power cord into the
charger and then plug the other end into
a power outlet.
●The charging lamp turns orange, and
charging begins.
●When charging is nished, the lamp turns
green.
3 Remove the battery pack.
●After unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing it in
(1) and up (2).
●Do not touch the battery charger plug for approximately 5 sec.
after removing the charger from the outlet.
●To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
●For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach
the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in
malfunction or damage to the product.
●If an abnormality occurs with the battery charger, the protective
circuit stops charging, and the lamp blinks orange. In this
instance, unplug the charger from the outlet, remove and then
replace the battery pack, and wait a while before plugging it into
the outlet again.
LC-E17E
18
Basic Guide
Before Use
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Remove the memory card.
●Push the memory card in until it clicks,
and then slowly release it.
●The memory card will pop up.
Setting the Date and Time
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this
way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when
you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.
1 Turn the camera on.
●Press the power button.
●The [Date/Time] screen is displayed.
2 Set the date and time.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the date.
●When nished, press the [ ] button.
3 Specify your home time zone.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your
home time zone.
3 Check the card’s write-protect tab
and insert the memory card.
●Recording is not possible on memory
cards with a write-protect tab when the
tab is in the locked position. Slide the tab
to the unlocked position (1).
●Insert the memory card with the label (2)
facing as shown until it clicks into place.
●Make sure the memory card is facing the
right way when you insert it. Inserting
memory cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
4 Close the cover.
●Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as
you slide it, until it clicks into the closed
position (2).
●Look at the screen display for the number of shots and movie
length that can be shot with the current card (=
23).
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Remove the battery pack.
●Open the cover and press the battery
lock in the direction of the arrow.
●The battery pack will pop up.
19
Basic Guide
Before Use
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Changing the Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
1 Access the menu screen.
●Press the [ ] button.
2 Choose [Date/Time].
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or use the [ ]
dial to select the [ 2] tab.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Date/Time], and then
press the [ ] button.
3 Change the date/time.
●Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and
Time” (=
18) to adjust the settings.
●Press the [ ] button to close the
menu screen.
●The camera includes a built-in date/time battery (backup battery).
Date/time settings are retained for about 3 weeks after the battery
pack is removed.
●The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you
insert a charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC
adapter kit (sold separately, =
148), even if the camera is left
off.
●Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will
be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date
and time as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (=
18).
4 Finish the setup process.
●Press the [ ] button when nished.
After a conrmation message, the setting
screen is no longer displayed.
●To turn off the camera, press the power
button.
●Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/
Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on.
Specify the correct information.
●To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2
and then choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial.
●You can also set the date and time by touching the desired option
on the screen shown in step 2 and then touching [ ][ ] to
adjust values, followed by [ ]. Similarly, to select your time
zone in the screen shown in step 3, touch [ ][ ] to choose your
time zone and then touch [ ] to conrm.
20
Basic Guide
Before Use
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Attaching a Lens
The camera is compatible with EF-M lenses. Use the Mount Adapter EF-
EOS M to attach EF and EF-S lenses as well (=
21).
1 Make sure the camera is off.
2 Remove the caps.
●Remove the rear lens cap and the body
cap by turning them as shown by the
arrows.
3 Attach the lens.
●Align the mount indexes (the white
circles) on the lens and camera, and turn
the lens until it clicks into place, as shown
by the arrow.
4 Remove the front lens cap.
●Turn the zoom ring on the lens to zoom.
●Zoom before focusing, because the
image may become unfocused if you
focus before zooming.
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
1 Enter Playback mode.
●Press the [ ] button.
2 Access the setting screen.
●Press and hold the [ ] button, and then
press the [ ] button.
3 Set the display language.
●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
●Once the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
●You can also change the display language by pressing the
[] button and choosing [Language ] on the [ 2] tab.
●You can also set the display language by touching a language on
the screen in step 3 and then touching it again.
21
Basic Guide
Before Use
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Attaching EF and EF-S Lenses
If you use Mount Adapter EF-EOS M, you can use EF and EF-S lenses.
1 Make sure the camera is off.
2 Remove the caps.
●Remove the caps, following step 2 in
“Attaching a Lens” (=
20).
3 Attach the lens to the adapter.
●To mount an EF lens, align the mount
indexes (the red circles) on the lens and
adapter, and turn the lens until it clicks
into place, as shown by the arrow.
●To mount an EF-S lens, align the mount
indexes (the white squares) on the lens
and adapter, and turn the lens until it
clicks into place, as shown by the arrow.
4 Attach the adapter to the camera.
●Align the mount indexes (the white
circles) on the adapter and camera. Turn
the lens as shown by the arrow until it
clicks into place.
●To protect the lens, keep the lens cap on when the camera is not
in use.
Detaching a Lens
●Make sure the camera is off.
●While pressing the lens release button
(1), turn the lens as shown by the arrow
(2).
●Turn the lens until it stops and then
detach it (3).
●Attach the lens cap to the detached lens.
●Minimizing Dust
- When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal
dust.
- When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to
attach the body cap to the camera.
- Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.
●The image sensor is smaller than the 35mm format, which causes
the attached lens’s focal length to appear magnied about 1.6x.
For example, an 18–55 mm focal length would be equivalent to
an approx. 29–88 mm focal length on a 35mm camera.
Lens Instruction Manual
Download electronic manuals for your lens from the following Internet
address.
http://www.canon.com/icpd/
22
Basic Guide
Before Use
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Using a Tripod
Use the tripod foot included with the adapter to attach the camera to a
tripod. Do not use the camera’s tripod socket.
●Attach the tripod foot to the adapter. Use
the turning dial to secure it rmly in place.
●Attach the tripod to the socket of the
tripod foot.
●If using an EF lens with a tripod foot (such as super telephoto
lenses), attach the tripod foot socket directly to the tripod.
Stabilizing the Image
If using a lens with an image stabilization function, you can compensate
for small camera movements (shaking) that occur while shooting. Lenses
with built-in image stabilization have “IS” in their names.
●Move the lens’s image stabilizer switch to
the [ON] position.
●If using a lens that is heavier than the camera, make sure support
is provided for the lens while carrying and shooting.
●Using adapters may extend the minimum shooting distance of the
lens or change its maximum magnication ratio or shooting range.
●If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during
autofocusing, do not touch the rotating part.
●The focus preset function on some super telephoto lenses is
unavailable. Also, the power zoom function of lens EF35–80mm
f/4–5.6 PZ is unavailable.
Detaching a Lens
1 Detach the adapter.
●Make sure the camera is off.
●While pressing the lens release button,
turn the adapter (with lens attached) as
shown by the arrow.
●Turn the adapter until it stops and then
detach it.
2 Detach the lens.
●While pushing down on the detach
lever on the adapter, turn the lens
counterclockwise.
●Turn the lens until it stops and then
detach it.
●Attach the lens cap to the detached lens.
23
Basic Guide
Before Use
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Shooting in Scene Intelligent Auto Mode
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
1 Turn the camera on.
●Press the power button.
2 Enter [ ] mode.
●Set the mode dial to [ ].
●A scene icon (1) is displayed in the upper
left of the screen.
●The top of the screen shows the number
of shots (2) and length of movie (3) you
can shoot with the current card.
●Frames displayed around any detected
faces or other subjects indicate that they
are in focus.
3 Compose the shot.
●If your lens supports zooming, turn the
zoom ring on the lens with your ngers
to zoom.
Trying the Camera Out
Still Images Movies
Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or
movies, and then view them.
Holding the Camera
To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera shake.
(1) Wrap your right hand around the camera grip rmly.
(2) Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.
(3) Rest your hand’s right index nger lightly on the shutter button.
(4) Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.
(5) To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the
other.
●When shooting movies, be careful not to
cover the microphones (1).
●When your press the shutter button
halfway in dark locations, the front lamp
(2) may light up to improve focus. Make
sure this light is not blocked by anything.
Horizontal shooting Vertical shooting
24
Basic Guide
Before Use
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
●Press the Movie button to begin
recording. [ Rec] is displayed with the
elapsed time.
●Displays black bars on the top and
bottom edges of the screen. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
●Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
●Once recording begins, take your nger
off the movie button.
2) Finish recording.
●To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
●An orange AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot
focus when you press the shutter button halfway. No picture is
taken, even if you press the shutter button all the way down.
●If using a lens that supports Dynamic IS (=
78), the camera
adjusts the range displayed on-screen to make the subject larger
once you begin shooting a movie.
4 Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
●Press the shutter button lightly, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and AF frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
●If [ ] ashes on-screen, move the [ ]
switch to raise the ash. The ash will re
upon shooting. If you prefer not to use the
ash, push it down with your nger, into
the camera.
2) Shoot.
●Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot. In low-light conditions, the ash
res automatically when you have it
raised.
●The captured image will be displayed for
approximately 2 seconds on the screen.
●Even while the shot is displayed, you can
take another shot by pressing the shutter
button again.
25
Basic Guide
Before Use
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
3 Play movies.
●Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button again.
●
Playback now begins, and after the movie
is nished, [
] is displayed.
●To adjust the volume during playback,
press the [ ][ ] buttons.
●To switch to shooting mode from playback mode, press the
shutter button down halfway (=
28), press the [ ] button, or
turn the mode dial.
●You can also start movie playback by touching [ ]. To adjust
the volume, drag quickly up or down across the screen during
playback.
Viewing
After shooting still images and movies, you can view them on the screen
as follows.
1 Enter Playback mode.
●Press the [ ] button.
●Your last shot is displayed.
2 Choose images.
●To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
[ ] dial clockwise.
●Press and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
●To access Scroll Display mode, turn the
[] dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the [ ]
dial to browse through images.
●To return to single-image display, press
the [ ] button.
●Movies are identied by a [ ] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
26
Basic Guide
Before Use
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Erasing Images
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.
1 Choose an image to erase.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
2 Erase the images.
●Press the [ ] button.
●After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
●The current image is now erased.
●To cancel erasure, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
●You can choose multiple images to erase at once (=
105).
●You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the
screen in step 2.
27
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
On/Off
Shooting Mode
●Press the power button to turn the
camera on and prepare for shooting.
●To turn the camera off, press the power
button again.
Playback Mode
●Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on and view your shots.
●Press the [ ] button again to go to
shooting mode.
●To turn off the camera, press the power
button.
●When an EF-M lens is attached to the camera and the power is
off, the aperture stops down to reduce the amount of light entering
the camera and protect the internal components of the camera.
As a result, when you turn the camera on or off, the aperture
makes a small noise as it opens or closes.
●When you turn the camera on or off, sensor cleaning will be
executed automatically. (A small sound may be heard.) After
turning on the camera, the LCD monitor will display the [ ] icon
while the sensor is being cleaned. The [ ] icon may not be
displayed if you turn the camera on and off rapidly over a short
period of time.
●To switch to shooting mode from playback mode, press the
shutter button down halfway (=
28), press the [ ] button, or
turn the mode dial.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your camera, including
shooting and playback options
1
28
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Shutter Button
To ensure that you focus on the intended subject when shooting, rst
lightly press the shutter button halfway down to focus, and then press the
button all the way down to shoot.
In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button halfway or all the way down.
1 Press halfway. (Press lightly to
focus.)
●Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice, and frames are
displayed around image areas in focus.
2 Press all the way down. (From the
halfway position, press fully to
shoot.)
●The shot is taken.
●Your intended subject may be out of focus if you shoot without
initially pressing the shutter button halfway.
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specic period of
inactivity.
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of
inactivity. In about two more minutes, the camera turns itself off. To
activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off but the
(rear) indicator lamp is still on, press the shutter button halfway (=
28).
Power Saving in Playback Mode
The camera turns itself off automatically after about ve minutes of
inactivity.
●You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of
Display Off, if you prefer (=
140).
●Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to
other devices via Wi-Fi (=
115) or connected to a computer
(=
159).
29
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Adjusting the Angle of the LCD
Monitor
You can adjust the screen angle and orientation to suit the scene or how
you are shooting.
Tilting the Screen Downward
●Pull the top of the screen down toward
you.
●The screen can be tilted downward
approximately 45°.
Tilting the Screen Upward
●Pull the bottom of the screen forward until
it clicks (1), slide the screen down (2),
and then rotate it upward (3).
●The screen can be tilted upward
approximately 180°.
●When you want to shoot from the front
of the camera, rotate the LCD monitor
upward to view the screen from the lens
side. The mirror image of the scene is
displayed (the image is rotated 180° on
the vertical axis).
●When nished, rotate the screen
downward (1) and then slide it up while
pushing in until it clicks (2).
Shooting Modes
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1) Scene Intelligent Auto Mode/
Hybrid Auto Mode
Fully automatic shooting, with
camera-determined settings
(=
35, =
37).
(2) Creative Assist Mode
Get the results and effects you
want quickly and easily. Settings
can also be saved and loaded
(=
48).
(3) Special Scene Mode
Shoot with optimal settings for
specic scenes (=
51).
(4) , , , , Modes
Take a variety of shots using
your preferred settings (=
60,
=
82, =
83, =
84, =
90).
(5) Movie Mode
For shooting movies (=
57,
=
86). You can also shoot
movies when the mode dial is
not set to Movie mode, simply by
pressing the movie button.
(6) Creative Filters Mode
Add a variety of effects to images
when shooting (=
52).
●You can turn the mode dial to switch to shooting mode from
playback mode.
30
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Shooting Display Options
Press the [ ] button to switch between displaying shooting
information, the grid lines and level.
This can be dened in more detail on the [ 1] tab, under [Shooting
information display] (=
87).
●Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view
function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier
to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image
brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that
any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not
affect recorded images.
●For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes”
(=
95).
●Keep the screen closed when the camera is not in use.
●Do not try to open the screen beyond the angles described, as
this may damage it.
●Go to the Menu (=
32) and set [Reverse Disp.] to [Off] on the
[1] tab to turn off the mirror-image function.
31
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
4 Finish the setup process.
●Press the [ ] button.
●The screen before you pressed the
[] button in step 1 is displayed again,
showing the option you congured.
●To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (=
145).
●Select [ ] in the menu and press the [ ] button to close the
options.
Using Touch-Screen Operations to Congure
Settings
●Touch the [ ] button on the upper right
of the screen to open the Quick Setting
menu.
●Touch the on-screen menu options to
make selections.
●Touch [ ] within a menu option, or touch
the currently selected option, to go back
to the previous screen.
●You can access the screen for options
labeled with a [ ] icon by touching
[ ].
Using the Quick Setting Menu
Commonly used functions can be congured in the (Quick Setting)
menu.
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
(=
179) or playback mode (=
188).
1 Access the menu.
●Press the [ ] button.
2 Choose a menu item.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
menu item (1).
●Available options (2) are shown at the
bottom of the screen.
3 Choose an option.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ][ ] dials to select an option.
●Options labeled with a [ ] icon can
be congured by pressing the [ ]
button.
32
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
4 Choose an option.
●For options with a vertical menu of
selections available, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose a
selection.
●For options with a horizontal menu, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose an option.
5 Finish the setup process.
●When nished, press the [ ] button to
return to option selection.
●Press the [ ] button to return to the
screen displayed before you pressed the
[ ] button in step 1.
●To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (=
145).
●Available menu items vary depending on the selected shooting or
playback mode (=
181 – =
188).
Using the Menu Screen
Congure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as
follows.
1 Access the menu screen.
●Press the [ ] button.
2 Choose a tab.
●Use the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to select a tab.
●There are two kinds of tabs: System tabs
(1) related to shooting [ ], playback
[ ], settings [ ] and more, and the
individual page tabs (2) under each
system tab. This guide refers to both tab
types together in the text (example: the
“[ 1] tab”).
3 Choose a menu item.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a menu item, and then
press the [ ] button.
●For menu items with options not shown,
rst press the [ ] button to switch
screens, and then either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to select the
menu item.
●To return to the previous screen, press
the [ ] button.
33
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
On-Screen Keyboard
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Wi-Fi connections
(=
115). Note that the length and type of information you can enter
varies depending on the function you are using.
Entering Characters
●Touch the characters to enter them.
●The amount of information you can enter
(1) varies depending on the function you
are using.
Moving the Cursor
●Touch [ ][ ].
Entering Line Breaks
●Touch [ ].
Switching Input Modes
●Touch [ ] to switch between numbers
and symbols.
●Touch [ ] to enter capital letters.
●Available input modes vary depending on
the function you are using.
Deleting Characters
●Touch [ ] to delete the previous
character.
Conrming Input and Returning to the
Previous Screen
●Touch [ ].
Touch-Screen Operations
●To access tabs, press the [ ] button to access the menu, touch a
system tab, and then a page tab to select a menu tab.
●Touch the desired setting to select it and then touch it again.
●When nished, touch the option to return to the menu screen.
●To congure menu items for which options are not shown, rst touch
the menu item to access the setting screen. To return to the previous
screen, touch [ ].
●You can also touch input elements (such as check boxes or text elds)
to select them, and you can enter text by touching the on-screen
keyboard.
●The [ ] and [ ] on-screen buttons have the same functions as
the [ ] and [ ] buttons.
●To dismiss the menu, press the [ ] button again.
34
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Indicator Display
The indicator on the back of the camera (=
3) lights up or blinks
depending on the camera status.
Color Indicator
Status Camera Status
Green
On Connected to a computer (=
159), or display
off (=
28, =
139, =
140)
Blinking
Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting
images, shooting long exposures (=
82,
=
84), or connecting/transmitting via Wi-Fi
●When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open
the memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which
may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to select
characters and icons. Press the [ ] button to make entries. Turn
the [ ] dial to move the cursor directly between characters.
Press the [ ] button to go back to the previous screen.
35
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Shooting with Camera-
Determined Settings
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
Still Images Movies
1 Turn the camera on.
●Press the power button.
2 Enter [ ] mode.
●Set the mode dial to [ ].
●A scene icon is displayed in the upper left
of the screen (=
39).
●Frames are displayed around faces
and subjects that have been detected,
indicating that they are in focus.
3 Compose the shot.
●If your lens supports zooming, turn the
zoom ring on the lens with your ngers
to zoom.
2
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control over shooting
36
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
●Press the movie button. Recording
begins, and [ Rec] is displayed with the
elapsed time.
●Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
●Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
●Once recording begins, take your nger
off the movie button.
2) Resize the subject and recompose
the shot as needed.
●To resize the subject, repeat the
operations in step 3.
However, note that the sound of camera
operations will be recorded.
●When you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will be
automatically adjusted.
3) Finish recording.
●To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
●Recording will stop automatically when
the memory card becomes full.
4 Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
●Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice after focusing, and
AF frames are displayed to indicate
image areas in focus.
●If [ ] ashes on-screen, move the [ ]
switch to raise the ash. It will re when
shooting. If you prefer not to use the
ash, push it down with your nger, into
the camera.
2) Shoot.
●Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot. In low-light conditions, the ash
res automatically when you have it
raised.
●The captured image will be displayed for
approximately 2 seconds on the screen.
●Even while the shot is displayed, you can
take another shot by pressing the shutter
button again.
37
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●The quality of digest movies is [ ] (in NTSC) or
[] (in PAL). This is dependent on your video format
settings (=
139).
●Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway
or trigger the self-timer.
●Digest movies are saved as separate movie les in the following
cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [ ] mode.
- The digest movie le size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the
total recording time reaches approximately 13 minutes and 20
seconds.
- The digest movie is protected (=
102).
- Daylight saving time (=
18), video system (=
139), time
zone settings (=
141) or copyright information (=
144) are
changed.
- A new folder is created (=
137).
●Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modied or erased.
●If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust
the setting in advance. Choose MENU (=
32) > [ 4] tab >
[Digest Type] > [No Stills] (=
32).
●Individual chapters can be edited (=
114).
Digest Movie Playback
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play the digest movie created
on the same day, or specify the date of the digest movie to play (=
96).
Still Images/Movies
●If the camera is turned on while the [ ] button is held
down, the camera will no longer sound. To activate sounds again,
press the [ ] button and choose [Beep] on the [ 3] tab,
and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [On].
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images Movies
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The
camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are
later combined in a digest movie.
1 Enter [ ] mode.
●Follow step 2 in “Shooting (Scene
Intelligent Auto)” (=
35), and choose
[ ].
2 Compose the shot.
●Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Scene
Intelligent Auto)” (=
35) to compose
the shot and focus.
●For more impressive digest movies,
aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
3 Shoot.
●Follow step 4 in “Shooting (Scene
Intelligent Auto)” (=
36) to shoot a still
image.
●The camera records both a still image
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with
the still image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
●Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [ ] mode, because
digest movies are recorded for each shot.
●A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [ ] mode, or
operating the camera in other ways.
●Sounds and vibrations from operating the camera or lens will be
recorded in digest movies.
38
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Movies
●The camera may become warm when shooting movies repeatedly
over an extended period. This does not indicate damage.
●Keep your ngers away from the microphone (1) while shooting
movies. Blocking the microphone may prevent audio from being
recorded or may cause the recording to sound mufed.
●Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button
and touch-screen controls when shooting movies. Sounds
made by the camera will be recorded. Touch-screen control is
recommended when adjusting settings while shooting movies.
●The sounds of the lens and camera operating are also recorded.
This can be reduced by using an external microphone (sold
separately) (=
157).
●If using a lens that supports Dynamic IS (=
78), the image
display area changes and subjects are enlarged once movie
recording begins to allow correction of signicant camera shake.
To shoot subjects at the same size shown before shooting, adjust
the image stabilization setting (=
78).
Still Images
●An orange AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot
focus when you press the shutter button halfway. No picture is
taken, even if you press the shutter button all the way down.
●When no people or subjects are detected, when the subject
is dark or has no contrast, or in extremely bright conditions, it
may take longer to achieve focus, or correct focus may not be
achieved.
●A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be
blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a
tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
●If your shots are dark despite the ash ring, move closer to the
subject. For details on the ash range, see “Internal Flash Range
Guide” (=
196).
●To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be lit
when the shutter button is pressed halfway in low-light conditions.
●If the ash res, vignetting may occur depending on the lens
being used.
●A blinking [ ] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot
indicates that shooting is not possible until the ash has nished
recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the ash is ready,
so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or
release it and press it again.
●Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen
is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus,
brightness, and colors used.
●The display shown right after shooting and before the saved
image is shown will feature vignetting.
●You can change how long images are displayed after shots
(=
47).
39
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Background
When Shooting Other Subjects Icon
Background
Color
Other
Subjects In Motion At Close
Range
Bright Gray
Bright and Backlit
With Blue Sky
Light Blue
Blue Sky and
Backlit
Sunsets – – Orange
Spotlights –
Dark Blue
Dark
Dark, Using
Tripod – –
●The “In Motion” icons are not displayed when the self-timer (=
40)
is on, when in [ ] mode, or when shooting a movie.
●The “When Shooting People” and “In Motion” icons are not displayed
when the lens is set to or you are using a lens that cannot
autofocus.
●Try shooting in [ ] mode (=
60) if the scene icon does not
match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot
with your expected effect, color, or brightness.
●Audio is recorded in stereo.
●The focus automatically adjusts while shooting movies, which
may cause the sound of the lens operating to be recorded. Using
an external microphone (sold separately) may help reduce these
lens sounds. If you do not want to record sound, go to the menu
(=
32), select the [ 5] tab, and set [Sound recording] to
[Disable].
●Go to the Menu (=
32), select the [ 5] tab, and set [Movie
Servo AF] to [Disable] to keep the focus xed during movie
recording.
●Movies that take up over 4 GB of space in a single shooting
are divided into multiple les. The movie shooting time on the
shooting screen ashes for approximately 30 sec. before the
movie reaches 4 GB in size. If you continue shooting and exceed
4 GB, the camera automatically creates a new movie le and
ashing stops. Divided movie les cannot be automatically played
in sequence. Each movie has to be viewed separately.
Scene Icons
Still Images Movies
In [ ] and [ ] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
Background
When Shooting People Icon
Background
Color
People In Motion
Bright Gray
Bright and Backlit
With Blue Sky Light Blue
Blue Sky and Backlit
Spotlights –
Dark Blue
Dark –
Dark, Using Tripod –
40
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Common, Convenient Features
Still Images Movies
Using the Self-Timer
Still Images Movies
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other
timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button.
1 Congure the setting.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (=
31).
●Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
2 Shoot.
●For still images: press the shutter button
halfway to focus on the subject, and then
press it all the way down.
●For movies: press the movie button.
On-Screen Frames
Still Images Movies
A variety of frames are displayed once the camera detects subjects you
are aiming the camera at.
●A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
determined by the camera to be the main subject. The frame follows
moving subjects within a certain range to keep them in focus.
●Press the shutter button halfway to focus. Once the scene is in focus,
the frame will turn green.
●In [ ] mode, if you press the shutter button halfway when the subject
is determined to be in motion, the frame will turn blue and the focus
and brightness will be recalibrated (servo AF). Once back in focus, the
frame will turn green.
●An orange AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot focus
when you press the shutter button halfway.
●Try shooting in [ ] mode (=
60) if no frames are displayed, if
frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are
displayed on the background or similar areas.
●Set [AF auto switch] to [Disable] on the [ 4] tab to turn off servo
AF. This turns off the “In Motion” icons (=
39). [AF auto switch]
is automatically set to [Disable] if the self-timer (=
40) is set to
anything besides [ ].
●To choose subjects to focus on, touch the desired subject on the
screen. [ ] is displayed, and the camera enters Touch AF mode.
41
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch
Shutter)
Still Images Movies
With this option, instead of pressing the shutter button, you can simply
touch the screen and release your nger to shoot. The camera will focus
on subjects and adjust image brightness automatically.
1 Enable touch-shutter function.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [Touch
Shutter] on the [ 1] tab, and then
choose [Enable] (=
32).
2 Shoot.
●Touch the subject on the screen to take
the picture.
●To cancel touch shutter, choose [Disable]
in step 1.
●If focus is not achieved, the AF frame turns orange and images
cannot be taken.
●Even while the shot is displayed, you can prepare for the next
shot by touching [ ].
●Once you start the self-timer, the lamp
will blink and the camera will play a self-
timer sound.
●Two seconds before the shot, the blinking
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the ash res.)
●To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[] button.
●To restore the original setting, choose [ ]
in step 1.
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
Still Images Movies
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you
have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are
pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.
●Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(=
40) and choose [ ].
●Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
●Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(=
40) to shoot.
42
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●During continuous shooting, focus, exposure and color tone are
locked at the position/level determined when you pressed the
shutter button halfway.
●Cannot be used with the self-timer (=
40).
●Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
●As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
●There may be a delay after continuous shooting before you can
shoot again, depending on the card type used and how many
images were shot.
●Shooting may slow down if the ash res.
●With Touch Shutter (=
41), the camera shoots continuously
while you touch the screen. Focus, exposure and color tone
during continuous shooting remain constant, after they are
determined for the rst shot.
●Images shown on-screen during continuous shooting differ from
the actual images and may look out of focus. Also, depending on
the lens used, the image displayed on-screen may appear darker
during continuous shooting. However, the images are recorded
with standard brightness.
●If the number of images that can be continually shot (burst image
count) is 1 – 9, the number of continual shots left is displayed
to the right of the total remaining shots at the top of the screen
(=
174). This is not shown if you can shoot 10 or more
continuous images.
●The number of continuous images you can shoot may decrease
depending on the shooting scene or your camera settings.
Continuous Shooting
Still Images Movies
In [ ] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot
continuously.
For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Drive, Self-timer
System” (=
192).
1 Congure the setting.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (=
31).
●Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
2 Shoot.
●Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
43
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
If selecting resolution based on paper size, use the following table as a
guide (when using 3:2 aspect ratio).
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
A3 (11.7 x 16.5 in.)
A4 (8.3 x 11.7 in.)
3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard
For e-mailing and similar purposes
Saving RAW Images
This camera can record images in JPEG and RAW formats.
JPEG
Images
Images are processed in the camera for optimal
image quality and compressed to reduce le size.
However, the compression process is irreversible,
and images cannot be restored to their original,
unprocessed state. Image processing may also
cause some loss of image quality.
RAW Images
The “raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with
essentially no loss of image quality from the
camera’s image processing. The data cannot be
used in this state for viewing on a computer or
printing. You must rst use the software (Digital
Photo Professional) (=
158) to convert images to
ordinary JPEG or TIFF les. Images can be adjusted
with minimal loss of image quality.
Image Customization Features
Changing Image Quality
Still Images Movies
You can select the resolution (size) and quality (compression ratio) of
your recorded images from a combination of 8 types. You can also dene
whether to save RAW images (=
43) or not. For guidelines on how
many shots at each quality setting can t on a memory card, see “Number
of Shots per Memory Card” (=
195).
●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(=
31).
●The option you congured is now
displayed.
●To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
●[ ] and [ ] indicate the different levels of image quality caused
by different compression rates. If using the same resolution, [ ]
will produce better image quality. [ ] will result in slightly lower
image quality, but will enable you to record more images. [ ] and
[] feature [ ] image quality.
●Not available in [ ] mode.
44
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Using the Menu
●Press the [ ] button, choose
[Image quality] on the [ 1] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (=
32).
●Turn the [ ] dial to choose
[] in [RAW]. This will save a RAW le
alongside the JPEG le. Select [–], and
the camera will only save the JPEG le.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to change [JPEG], selecting
your preferred save resolution and
compression ratio. Select [–], and the
camera will only save the RAW le.
●When nished, press the [ ] button to
return to the menu screen.
●You cannot set both the [RAW] and [JPEG] image setting to [–] at
the same time.
●Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (=
31).
●If you want to save only the RAW image,
select [ ].
●To save both a JPEG and a RAW image,
select your desired image quality in
the setting screen and then press the
[] button to add a [ ] to [RAW].
To go back to the original save method,
remove the [ ] from [RAW].
●When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images
recorded together) to a computer, always use the dedicated
software “EOS Utility” (=
158).
●For details on resolution and the number of shots that will t on a
card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (=
195).
●The le extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension for
RAW images is .CR2. JPEG and RAW images recorded together
will have the same image number in their lenames.
●Consult “Software” (=
158) to learn more about the Digital
Photo Professional and EOS Utility software.
45
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Changing Movie Image Quality
Still Images Movies
You can set the quality (image size and frame rate) of movies. The frame
rate (number of frames recorded per second) is determined by your video
format settings (=
139). For guidelines on the maximum movie length at
each level of image quality that will t on a memory card, see “Recording
Time per Memory Card” (=
196).
●Press the [ ] button, choose [Movie rec.
size] in the menu, and choose the desired
option (=
31).
●The option you congured is now
displayed.
Video format set to [NTSC]
Image
Quality Resolution Frame Rate Details
1920 x 1080 29.97 fps For shooting in Full
HD. [ ] enables
shooting with a
cinematic frame rate.
1920 x 1080 23.98 fps
1280 x 720 59.94 fps For shooting in HD
640 x 480 29.97 fps For shooting in
standard denition
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Still Images Movies
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(=
31).
●Once the setting is complete, the screen
aspect ratio will be updated.
●To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.
Same aspect ratio as 35mm lm, used for printing images at 5 x
7-inch or postcard sizes.
Used for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series sizes.
Square aspect ratio.
●Not available in [ ] mode.
●This can also be dened in the menu (=
32) by going to the
[1] tab and choosing the [Still Image Aspect Ratio] option.
46
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Using the Dual Axis Electronic
Level
Still Images Movies
An electronic level can be displayed as a guideline to ensure the camera
is level from front to back and left to right.
1 Display the electronic level.
●Press the [ ] button several times to
display the electronic level.
2 Straighten the camera.
●(1) indicates the front-back orientation
and (2) the left-right orientation.
●If the camera is tilted, move it so that the
red line changes to green.
●If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, go to the menu
(=
32) and check your settings in the [Shooting information
display] option on the [ 1] tab (=
87).
●The electronic level is not displayed in [ ] mode or during
movie recording.
●If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic
level will be updated automatically to match the camera
orientation.
●Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you
level the camera (=
139).
Video format set to [PAL]
Image
Quality Resolution Frame Rate Details
1920 x 1080 25.00 fps For shooting in Full HD
1280 x 720 50.00 fps For shooting in HD
640 x 480 25.00 fps For shooting in
standard denition
●[ ] and [ ] will display black bars on the left and
right sides of the screen. [ ], [ ], [ ],
[], and [ ] will display black bars on the top and
bottom of the screen. The black bars indicate image areas not
recorded.
●This can be set up in the menu (=
32) by going to the [ 5]
tab and choosing the [Movie rec. size] option.
47
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots
Still Images Movies
●Press the [ ] button, choose
[Image review] on the [ 1] tab, and then
choose the desired option.
●To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [2 sec.].
2 sec.,
4 sec.,
8 sec.
Displays images for the specied time. Even while the shot is
displayed, you can take another shot by pressing the shutter
button halfway again.
Hold Displays images until you press the shutter button halfway.
Off No image display after shots.
●By pressing the [ ] button while an image is displayed after
shooting, you can switch the display information.
Customizing Camera Operation
Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as
follows.
For instructions on menu functions, see “Using the Menu Screen”
(=
32).
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from
Lighting Up
Still Images Movies
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce
red-eye when the ash is used in low-light shots.
1 Access the [Flash Control] screen.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 3] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (=
32).
2 Congure the setting.
●Choose [Red-eye reduc.], and then
choose [Off] (=
32).
●To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
48
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Shooting with Your Favorite
Settings (Creative Assist)
Even if you don’t know much about photography, you can select from on-
screen options written in plain English to change the brightness, blur the
background, and take pictures that are all your own. You can also save
your favorite settings and easily load them back in later. Settings can even
be applied from images shot in [ ] mode.
When you display images shot in [ ] mode, the camera can show you
which [ ] mode settings correspond to which camera settings, making it
easier to step up to the Creative Auto shooting modes ([ ], [ ], [ ],
or [ ]).
The following options can be changed.
Background
This lets you dene how the background appears.
The higher the value this is, the sharper the
background gets. The lower the value, the more
blurred the background.
Brightness This lets you adjust the image brightness. The
higher this value, the brighter the image is.
Contrast
This lets you adjust the contrast. The higher this
is, the stronger the contrast between light and dark
colors.
Saturation
This lets you dene how vivid the colors are. The
higher this value, the more colorful the image;
the lower it is, the more subdued and rened it
becomes.
Color tone
This lets you dene the tone of the colors. Higher
values result in warmer colors, while lower ones
make the colors seem colder.
Monochrome
You can choose from ve color tones in
Monochrome: [ B/W], [ Sepia], [ Blue],
[ Purple] and [ Green]. Set this to [ ] to shoot
in color. If this is set to anything besides [ ],
[Saturation] and [Color tone] are not available.
3
Other Shooting Modes
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take shots enhanced with
unique image effects or captured using special functions
49
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Saving/Loading Settings
You can save your favorite settings and reload them later for repeated
use.
Saving Settings
●Follow steps 1 and 2 in “Shooting with
Your Favorite Settings (Creative Assist)”
(=
49) to select [ ] and set up your
preferences.
●Press the [ ] button, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and
then press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ][ ] dials to select where to save
your settings.
●You can save up to six sets of settings.
●If you select a previously saved set,
[ Compare] will be displayed. In
this mode, when you press the [ ]
button, the previously saved settings
will be displayed on-screen, letting you
compare them with your new settings.
●Press the [ ] button; a conrmation
screen is displayed. Press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to select [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
1 Enter [ ] mode.
●Set the mode dial to [ ].
2 Congure the settings.
●Press the [ ] button, and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the option.
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
[ ] dials to change options (=
31).
●Once everything is set up, press the
[] button to return to the shooting
screen.
3 Shoot.
●When shooting with ash, [Background] cannot be set.
●Adjust the values of the options with [ ] shown next to them
in the shooting screen by turning the [ ] dial. Press the
[][ ] buttons to move the [ ], and select the option to
adjust.
●Your settings are reset when the power is turned off, but set [Keep
setting] in [ 4] to [Enable] to save your settings even after
turning off the camera.
●Touch [ ] at the upper right of the screen to show settings. You
can also touch options in the settings screen to adjust them.
Touch [ ] to return to the shooting screen.
50
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Playing Back Images
●When displaying images shot in [ ]
mode, press the [ ] button to display
the screen shown to the left, letting you
view the settings used when the picture
was taken.
[ ] Mode and Creative Zone Settings
[ ] mode setting Creative Auto setting
(A) Background (a) Aperture value (=
83)
(B) Brightness
(b) Exposure compensation (=
61)
Flash time is (b’) Flash exposure compensation
(=
76)
(C) Color tone (c) WB Correction (=
65)
(D) Contrast (d) Picture Style contrast (=
68)
(E) Saturation (e) Picture Style saturation (=
68)
(F) Monochrome (f) Picture Style lter and toning effect
(=
68)
Loading
●Follow step 1 in “Shooting with Your
Favorite Settings (Creative Assist)”
(=
49) to select [ ].
●Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ][ ]
dials to select the settings to load.
●Press the [ ] button to apply the saved
settings.
●Select [–] and press the [ ] button to go
back without applying any settings.
Using Screen Settings
You can load settings from images shot in [ ] mode and use them to
shoot your own pictures.
●Follow step 1 in “Shooting with Your
Favorite Settings (Creative Assist)”
(=
49) to choose [ ].
●Press the [ ] button to enter Playback
mode, and then select an image shot in
[ ] for display.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and press the [ ] button again.
●The settings are applied and the camera
goes into shooting mode.
●A message is displayed if you try to apply settings when the
mode dial is set to anything besides [ ]. The camera does not
return to shooting mode. Turn the mode dial to [ ] to apply the
settings.
●Images shot in anything besides [ ] mode will not be shown in
[] mode.
51
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Shooting Flowers and Small Objects
(Close-up)
Still Images Movies
●Take pictures of owers and other objects
from close up to make them look huge in
your photos.
●To make small things appear even larger,
use a macro lens (sold separately).
●Check the attached lens for its minimum
focusing distance from the subject.
The lens minimum focusing distance is
measured from the [ ] (focal plane)
mark on the top of the camera to the
subject.
Shooting Moving Subjects (Sports)
Still Images Movies
●When using a lens with “STM” in its
name, the camera keeps focusing while
shooting continuously. With other lenses,
focus is locked at the position determined
when you pressed the shutter button
halfway.
Shooting Evening Scenes
without Using a Tripod (Handheld
NightScene)
Still Images Movies
●Beautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hold the
camera very still (as with a tripod).
●A single image is created by combining
consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
Specic Scenes
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
automatically congure the settings for optimal shots.
1 Enter [ ] mode.
●Set the mode dial to [ ].
2 Choose a shooting mode.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(=
31).
3 Shoot.
Shooting Portraits (Portrait)
Still Images Movies
●Take shots of people with a softening
effect.
Shooting Landscapes (Landscape)
Still Images Movies
●You can shoot wide-open landscapes
with the focus close up or far away,
letting you capture vivid skies and nature
scenes.
52
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Image Effects (Creative Filters)
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.
1 Enter [ ] mode.
●Set the mode dial to [ ].
2 Choose a shooting mode.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(=
31).
3 Shoot.
●Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.
●In [ ] and [ ] modes, shots may look grainy because the ISO
speed (=
62) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.
●Because the camera will shoot continuously in [ ] mode, hold it
steady while shooting.
●In [ ] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions
may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.
●When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [ ] mode
instead of [ ] mode will give better results (=
35).
Taking Vivid Pictures of Food (Food)
Still Images Movies
Any dish can look like a bright and colorful delight.
1 Choose [ ].
●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(=
51) and choose [ ].
2 Change the color tone.
●Turn the [ ] dial to change color
tones.
3 Shoot.
●This mode may produce unsuitable color tones for human
subjects.
●If you use ash, the Tone setting will switch to standard.
53
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Adding Artistic Effects
●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
52) and choose
[ ].
●Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect
level.
●A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Natural Images are natural and organic.
Art Standard Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast.
Art Vivid Images resemble vivid illustrations.
Art Bold Images resemble oil paintings, with bold edges.
Art Embossed Images resemble old photos, with bold edges and
dark ambiance.
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (High Dynamic
Range)
Still Images Movies
Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels
each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal
brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washed-
out highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tend to occur in high-
contrast shots.
1 Choose [ ].
●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
52) and choose
[ ].
2 Shoot.
●Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
When you press the shutter button all
the way down, the camera will take three
shots and combine them.
●Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
●If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount
the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
Additionally, you should turn off image stabilization when using a
tripod or other means to secure the camera (=
78).
●Any subject movement will make the image blurry.
●There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes and combines the images.
54
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
2 Choose an effect level.
●Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect
level.
●A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3 Shoot.
Shooting Watercolor-like Photos (Water Painting
Effect)
Still Images Movies
You can shoot pictures with a light, soft watercolor-like effect.
1 Choose [ ].
●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
52) and choose
[ ].
2 Choose an effect level.
●Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect
level.
●A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3 Shoot.
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye
Effect)
Still Images Movies
Shoot with the distorting effect of a sh-eye lens.
1 Choose [ ].
●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
52) and choose
[ ].
2 Choose an effect level.
●Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect
level.
●A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3 Shoot.
●Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Shooting Oil Painting-like Photos (Art Bold
Effect)
Still Images Movies
Emphasize the three-dimensional shape of the subject for an oil-like
effect.
1 Choose [ ].
●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
52) and choose
[ ].
55
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time (for
One-Minute Clips)
Speed Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
●Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
●To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the [ ][ ]
buttons in step 2. To move the frame, press the [ ][ ] buttons
again. To return the frame to horizontal orientation, press the
[][ ] buttons.
●Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the
frame.
●Movie quality depends on the video format (=
139) and still-
image aspect ratio (=
45).
●If the video system is set to [NTSC], the quality is [ ] for
the [ ] aspect ratio and [ ] for the [ ] aspect ratio.
●If the video system is set to [PAL], the quality is [ ] for the
[] aspect ratio and [ ] for the [ ] aspect ratio.
●You can also move the frame by touching or dragging across the
screen.
Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature
Effect)
Still Images Movies
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above
and below your selected area.
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is
not recorded.
1 Choose [ ].
●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
52) and choose
[ ].
●A white frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that will not be blurred.
2 Choose the area to keep in focus.
●Press the [ ] button.
●Press the [ ] button to resize the
frame, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial to move it.
3 For movies, choose the movie
playback speed.
●Turn the [ ] dial to choose the speed.
4 Return to the shooting screen and
shoot.
●Press the [ ] button to return to the
shooting screen, and then shoot.
56
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect
Still Images Movies
This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus lter were
attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.
1 Choose [ ].
●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
52) and choose
[ ].
2 Choose an effect level.
●Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect
level.
●A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3 Shoot.
●Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera
Effect)
Still Images Movies
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.
1 Choose [ ].
●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
52) and choose
[ ].
2 Choose a color tone.
●Turn the [ ] dial to choose a color
tone.
●A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3 Shoot.
Standard Shots resemble toy camera images.
Warm Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
●Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
57
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Shooting Movies in Movie Mode
Still Images Movies
1 Enter [ ] mode.
●Set the mode dial to [ ].
●Displays black bars on the top and
bottom edges of the screen. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (=
31).
2 Congure the settings to suit the
movie (=
177).
3 Shoot.
●Press the movie button.
●To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
●If using a lens that supports Dynamic IS (=
78), selecting [ ]
mode adjusts the range displayed on-screen to make the subject
larger.
●Touch the [ ] button before or during shooting to show the
[] icon and use a xed focal position.
●Touch [ ] on the screen before or during shooting to switch
between automatic or xed focus position when shooting. (The
[] on the upper-left corner of the [ ] icon turns green when
using automatic focus position adjustment.) This is not displayed
when [Movie Servo AF] (=
39) is set to [Disable] on the [ 5]
tab in the menu.
Shooting in Monochrome (Grainy B/W)
Still Images Movies
You can take pictures with a rough monochrome feel.
1 Choose [ ].
●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
(Creative Filters)” (=
52) and choose
[ ].
2 Choose an effect level.
●Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect
level.
●A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3 Shoot.
58
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●In the menu (=
32), set [AF w/ shutter button during ] on
the [ 5] tab to [Disable] to turn off focusing when the shutter
button is pressed halfway when shooting movies.
●In [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ]
(16:9 aspect ratio) modes, still photos will be saved in the [ ]
aspect ratio.
●In [ ] and [ ] (4:3 aspect ratio) modes, still photos
will be saved in the [ ] aspect ratio.
Locking or Changing Image Brightness
Still Images Movies
Before or during recording, you can lock the exposure, or change it in 1/3-
stop increments within a range of -3 to +3 stops.
●Press the [ ] button to lock the
exposure. To unlock the exposure, press
the [ ] button again.
●Turn the exposure compensation dial to
adjust the brightness as you watch the
screen.
●You can also lock and unlock the exposure by touching [ ] on
the screen.
●During shooting, touch the exposure compensation bar at the
bottom of the screen and then touch the [ ][ ] buttons to change
the exposure.
●Exposures adjusted by changing the exposure correction with
the touch screen will not feature the same exposure correction
settings as when using the exposure compensation dial. Look at
the screen to verify the exposure.
Shooting Still Images during Movie Recording
Still Images Movies
Shoot still images during movie recording as follows.
1 While shooting a movie, focus on a
subject.
●Press the shutter button halfway down
to readjust the focus and exposure. (The
camera will not beep.)
●Movie recording will continue.
2 Shoot.
●Press the shutter button all the way
down.
●Your shot will be recorded.
●Shooting still images during movie recording may not be possible
when the memory card’s recording speed is slow, or when there is
not enough free internal memory.
●Shutter sounds will be heard in the movie.
●An orange AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot
focus when you press the shutter button halfway. No picture is
taken, even if you press the shutter button all the way down.
●The ash does not re.
●Movie recording may stop if shooting still images lls up the
internal memory.
59
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Turning Off the Wind Filter
Noise caused by strong wind can be reduced. However, the recording
may sound unnatural when this option is used when there is no wind. You
can turn off the wind lter for these situations.
●Follow step 1 in “Adjusting the Recording
Volume” (=
59) to display the [Sound
recording] screen.
●Choose [Wind lter/Attenuator] and press
the [ ] button.
●Choose [Wind Filter] and then [Off].
Using the Attenuator
The attenuator can help reduce sound clipping in loud environments.
However, this reduces the recording volume for scenes shot in quieter
environments.
●Follow step 1 in “Adjusting the Recording
Volume” (=
59) to display the [Sound
recording] screen.
●Choose [Wind lter/Attenuator] and press
the [ ] button.
●Choose [Attenuator], and then choose
[On].
Sound Settings
Still Images Movies
Adjusting the Recording Volume
In [Auto], although the recording level (volume) is adjusted automatically,
you can set the level manually to suit the shooting scene.
1 Access the [Sound recording]
screen.
●Press the [ ] button, choose
[Sound recording] on the [ 5] tab, and
then press the [ ] button (=
32).
2 Congure the settings.
●Select [Sound recording] and press the
[ ] button. In the next screen, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
select [Manual] and then press the [ ]
button.
●Press the [ ] button to choose [Rec.
level]. Press the [ ] button. In the next
screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to dene the level and then
press the [ ] button.
●To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Auto].
60
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Shooting in Program AE
([P] Mode)
Still Images Movies
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting
style.
1 Enter [ ] mode.
●Set the mode dial to [ ].
2 Customize the settings as desired
(=
61 – =
81), and then shoot.
●Movies can be recorded in [ ] mode as well, by pressing the
movie button. However, some menu (=
31, =
32) settings
may be automatically adjusted for movie recording.
4
P Mode
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style
●Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode dial set
to [ ] mode.
●[]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
●Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than
[], make sure the function is available in that mode (=
177).
61
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Image Brightness (Exposure)
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure
Compensation)
Still Images Movies
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of –3 to +3.
●As you watch the screen, turn the
exposure compensation dial to adjust
brightness.
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock)
Still Images Movies
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and
exposure separately.
1 Lock the exposure.
●Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked, and then press
the [ ] button.
●[] is displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
●Press the [ ] button again to cancel and
remove the [ ] icon.
2 Compose the shot and shoot.
Adjusting Shooting Functions
from a Single Screen
The INFO. Quick Control screen lets you quickly adjust options using a
single screen of functions.
1 Access the INFO. Quick Control
screen.
●Press the [ ] button repeatedly to
display the INFO. Quick Control screen.
2 Select a function to adjust.
●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
a function and display a description.
●You can also turn the [ ][ ] dials to
access functions.
●The adjustable functions differ depending on the shooting mode.
●Some functions open up another options screen when you
choose them and press the [ ] button. Options labeled with a
[] icon in the second screen can be congured by pressing
the [ ] button. Press the [ ] button to return to the INFO.
Quick Control screen.
●Touch a function in the INFO. Quick Control screen, and then
touch it again to go to the adjustment screen for the function.
Touch [ ] to return to the previous screen.
●Touch [ ] on the upper right of the function description to close
the description display.
62
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●In [ ] mode, exposure is locked when you press the shutter
button halfway. In [ ] [ ] [ ] modes, the exposure is not
locked when you press the shutter button halfway and is not
determined until the moment you shoot the picture.
●This can also be adjusted by choosing [Metering mode] on the
[3] tab of the menu (=
32).
Changing the ISO Speed
Still Images Movies
●Press the [ ] button, turn the [ ] dial to
choose the ISO speed, and then press
the [ ] button.
●The option you congured is now
displayed.
AUTO
Automatically adjusts
the ISO speed to suit
the shooting mode and
conditions.
100, 125, 160, 200 For shooting outdoors in
fair weather.
250, 320, 400, 500, 640, 800 For shooting in cloudy
conditions, or at twilight.
1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200,
4000, 5000, 6400, 8000, 10000, 12800
For shooting night
scenes, or in dark rooms.
Shooting sensitivity increases as the ISO speed goes up. The lower the
speed, the lower the sensitivity.
●AE: Auto Exposure
●After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination
of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the [ ] dial
(Program Shift).
Changing the Metering Method
Still Images Movies
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(=
31).
●The option you congured is now
displayed.
Evaluative
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit
shots. Automatically adjusts standard exposure to
match the shooting conditions.
Partial
metering
Effective when the background is much brighter
than the subject due to backlighting, etc. Metering is
restricted to within the circular frame (Spot AE Point
frame) displayed in the center of the screen.
Spot
For metering a specic spot of the subject or scene.
Metering restricted to within the circular frame (Spot
AE Point frame), displayed in the center of the
screen.
Center
Weighted
Avg.
Determines the average brightness of light across
the entire image area, calculated by treating
brightness in the central area as more important.
63
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)
Still Images Movies
Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels
(standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each
time you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and
overexposure (relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in 1/3-
stop increments.
1 Access the setting screen.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [AEB]
on the [ 3] tab, and then press the [ ]
button (=
32).
2 Congure the settings.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to adjust values.
●To cancel the AEB function, follow steps
1 – 2 to set the AEB correction value to 0.
●AEB cannot be used when the ash is not set to [ ], Multi Shot
Noise Reduction is on (=
80), or when continuous or bulb
shooting is active.
●If exposure compensation is already in use (=
61), the value
specied for that function is treated as the standard exposure
level for this function. In step 2, you can turn the exposure
compensation dial on the screen to adjust the correction.
●To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have
set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.
●Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image
graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera
shake in some shooting conditions.
●Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which
may reduce subject and camera shake and increase the ash
range. However, shots may look grainy.
●This can also be adjusted by going to [ISO speed] on the [ 3]
tab of the menu (=
32) and selecting [ISO speed].
●If you want to select speeds up to [H] (equivalent to ISO 25600),
go to the menu (=
32), choose [C.Fn I:Exposure] from the
[1] tab, and set [ISO expansion] to [1:On] (=
88).
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings
Still Images Movies
You can select the maximum ISO speed used when ISO speed is set to
[AUTO].
1 Access the setting screen.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [ISO
speed] on the [ 3] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (=
32).
2 Congure the settings.
●Choose [ISO Auto] and then choose an
option (=
32).
64
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Shooting Bright Subjects (Highlight Tone
Priority)
Still Images Movies
The camera can improve gradation on the high-brightness spectrum to
reduce clipped whites on the subject.
●Press the [ ] button, choose
[Highlight tone priority] on the [ 3] tab,
and choose [D+] (=
32).
●Setting this to [D+] makes ISO speeds below 160 unavailable.
The Auto Lighting Optimizer will also be set to [Disable].
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast
(Auto Lighting Optimizer)
Still Images Movies
If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and
contrast can be corrected automatically.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(=
31).
●Depending on the shooting conditions, noise may increase.
●When the effect of the Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and
the image becomes excessively bright, set it to [Low] or [Disable].
●If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure
compensation or ash exposure compensation to darken the
exposure, the image may still come out bright, or the effect of
AEB-based exposure compensation may be reduced. If you want
a darker exposure, set this function to [Disable].
●The Auto Lighting Optimizer can also be set with the [Auto
Lighting Optimizer] option on the [ 3] tab of the menu
(=
32).
65
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Custom White Balance
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
1 Shoot a white object.
●Fill the LCD monitor screen with a sheet
of white paper, etc.
●Focus manually and shoot (=
74).
2 Select [Custom White Balance].
●On the [ 4] tab, select [Custom White
Balance] and then press the [ ] button.
●The custom white balance selection
screen will appear.
3 Load the white data.
●Select the image that was captured in
step 1 and then press [ ].
●In the conrmation screen, press the
[][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
●Press the [ ] button to close the
menu.
4 Select [ ].
●Follow the steps in “Adjusting White
Balance” (=
65) to select [ ].
Image Colors
Adjusting White Balance
Still Images Movies
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natural for the scene you are shooting.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(=
31).
●The option you congured is now
displayed.
Auto Automatically sets the optimal white balance for
the shooting conditions.
Day Light For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
Shade For shooting in the shade.
Cloudy For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight.
Tungsten light Tungsten
White
uorescent
light
For shooting under white uorescent lighting.
Flash For shooting with the ash.
Custom For manually setting a custom white balance.
66
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
2 Congure advanced settings.
●To congure more advanced settings,
press the [ ] button and adjust the
correction level by turning the [ ][ ]
dials.
●To reset the correction level, press the
[] button.
●Press the [ ] button to complete the
setting.
●Once you set a correction value, it will be retained even after
changing the white balance value in step 1.
●B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green
●One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about 5
mireds on a color temperature conversion lter. (Mired: Color
temperature unit representing color temperature conversion lter
density)
●This can also be adjusted by going to the menu (=
32) and
choosing [WB Correction] on the [ 4] tab.
●You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging
the bar in step 1 or the frame in step 2.
●You can also access the screen in step 2 by touching [ ] in
step 1.
●If the exposure obtained in step 1 is too bright or dark, a correct
white balance may not be obtained.
●A message will appear if you use an image in step 3 that is not
suitable for loading white data. Choose [Cancel] to select another
image. Choose [OK], and the chosen image will be used to
load white data, although this may not produce a suitable white
balance.
●If you see an [Unselectable image.] message in step 3, select
[OK] to close the message and select another image.
●If you see a [Set WB to “ ”] message in step 3, press the [ ]
button to return to the menu screen and then select [ ].
●Instead of a white object, a gray chart or 18% gray reector
(commercially available) can produce a more accurate white
balance.
●The current white balance settings do not matter at the time you
shoot the image in step 1.
Manually Correcting White Balance
Still Images Movies
You can manually correct white balance. This adjustment can match the
effect of using a commercially available color temperature conversion lter
or color-compensating lter.
1 Congure the setting.
●Follow the steps in “Adjusting White
Balance” (=
65) to choose the white
balance option.
●Turn the [ ] dial to adjust the
correction level for B and A.
67
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
User Dene
You can add a basic style such as [Portrait] or
[Landscape], a Picture Style le, etc., and adjust
it as desired (=
67).
●If no Picture Style is added to [ ], [ ] or [ ], these
settings will be the same as the [Auto] default settings.
●This can also be adjusted by going to the menu (=
32) and
choosing [Picture Style] on the [ 4] tab.
Using Your Favorite Shades (Picture Style)
Still Images Movies
Picture Styles allow you to use your preferred color hues in dened picture
and subject conditions. There are 6 types of Picture Styles available and
all are fully adjustable.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(=
31).
Auto
The color tone will be adjusted automatically
to suit the scene. The colors will look vivid,
especially for blue skies, greenery, and sunsets
in nature, outdoor, and sunset scenes.
Standard The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. Suitable
for most scenes.
Portrait
For smooth skin tones. The image looks softer.
Suited for close-up portraits. Change the [Color
tone] to adjust skin tones (=
68).
Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp
and crisp images. Effective for impressive
landscapes.
Neutral For images to be processed by computer later.
Natural color tones and a subdued look.
Faithful
For images to be processed by computer later.
When the subject is captured under a color
temperature of 5200K, the color is adjusted
colorimetrically to match the subject’s color.
Vivid colors are suppressed for a subdued look.
Monochrome Creates black-and-white images.
68
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
1 Access the setting screen.
●Follow the steps in “Using Your Favorite
Shades (Picture Styles)” (=
67) to
select the Picture Style you want.
●Press the [ ] button.
2 Congure the settings.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item; then, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ][ ] dials to choose an
option.
●Press the [ ] button to undo any
changes.
●When nished, press the [ ] button.
●Increasing the [Contrast] will make the [Filter effect] more
pronounced.
Adjusting Picture Styles
The following settings can be adjusted for each Picture Style.
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness of the subject. Lower
values produce softer (more blurred) effects;
higher values produce sharper results.
Contrast
Adjusts the contrast. Lower values produce
weaker contrast; higher values produce
stronger contrast.
Saturation*1
Adjusts the color saturation in the image.
Lower values produce shallower colors;
higher values produce deeper colors.
Color tone*1
Adjusts skin color tone. Lower values
produce redder hues; higher values produce
colors that are more yellow.
Filter effect*2
Emphasizes white clouds in monochrome
images, or the greens of trees.
N: Normal black-and-white image with no
lter effects.
Ye: The blue sky will look more natural, and
the white clouds will look crisper.
Or: The blue sky will look slightly darker.
Sunsets will look more brilliant.
R: The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall
leaves will look crisper and brighter.
G: Skin tones and lips will appear muted.
Green tree leaves will look crisper and
brighter.
Toning effect*2
The following monochrome colors can be
selected: [N:None], [S:Sepia], [B:Blue],
[P:Purple] or [G:Green].
*1 Not available in [ ] mode.
*2 Only available in [ ] mode.
69
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Shooting Range and Focusing
Selecting the AF Method
Still Images Movies
You can change the AF (autofocus) method to use as necessary for your
scene and subject.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and then choose the desired
option (=
32).
●When the subject is dark or has no contrast, in extremely bright
conditions, or with some EF and EF-S lenses, it may take longer
to achieve focus, or correct focus may not be achieved. For more
information about lenses, refer to the Canon website.
●This can also be adjusted by going to the menu (=
32) and
choosing [AF method] on the [ 2] tab.
1-Point AF
●Focus using a single frame. Effective for reliable focusing.
●Press the shutter button halfway down. Once the scene is in focus, the
frame will turn green.
Saving Customized Picture Styles
Basic styles like [ ] and [ ] can be adjusted to your liking and
saved for later. You can save multiple Picture Styles with different settings
for parameters such as sharpness and contrast.
1 Select a Picture Style to save.
●Follow the steps in “Using Your Favorite
Shades (Picture Styles)” (=
67) to
select [ ], [ ] or [ ].
2 Select the base Picture Style.
●Press the [ ] button.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ][ ] dials to select the Picture Style
that will serve as a base.
3 Adjust the style.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to select the
item to adjust; then, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ][ ] dials to
adjust the item.
●When nished, press the [ ] button.
●In step 2, you can also select styles added to the camera using
the EOS Utility software (=
158).
70
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●The maximum number of frames displayed depends on the
chosen aspect ratio (=
45).
- [] [ ] [ ]: 49 frames
- []: 35 frames
●You can change the frame’s position (=
71). To compose shots
so that subjects are positioned at the edge or in a corner without
changing the frame position, rst aim the camera to capture
the subject in an AF frame, and then hold the shutter button
halfway down. As you continue to hold the shutter button halfway,
recompose the shot as desired, and then press the shutter button
all the way down (Focus Lock).
●Follow steps 2 – 4 in “Shooting in Manual Focus Mode” (=
74)
to magnify the position of the AF frame. The touch shutter does
not work while using this operation.
+Tracking
●After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed
around the face of the person determined by the camera to be the
main subject. You can also choose the subject yourself (=
71).
●When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving
subjects, within a certain range.
●Press the shutter button halfway down. The frame will turn green when
focused.
●If no face is found, after you press the shutter button halfway, a green
frame is displayed around the area in focus.
●Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
- Subjects that are distant or extremely close
- Subjects that are dark or light
- Faces in prole, at an angle, or partly hidden
●The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
●An orange AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot
focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
●Gray frames are displayed over faces detected at the edge of the
screen. These cannot be focused upon by pressing the shutter
button halfway.
71
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●You can press the [ ] button to select people’s faces or move
the AF frame.
- When the AF frame mode is set to [ ], after pressing
the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to move the
frame, and then press the [ ] button to return to the shooting
screen. Hold down the [ ] button for at least two seconds
to reset the frame to the center of the shooting or frame-
adjustment screen.
- When the AF frame mode is set to [ ], after pressing
the [ ] button, [Face Select: On] will be displayed and [ ]
will be shown over the face determined to be the main subject.
To switch the face frame [ ] to another detected face, keep
pressing the [ ] button. Once you go through all available
faces, [Face Select: Off] will be displayed and the frame will
disappear.
Shooting with the AF Lock
Still Images Movies
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will
not change even when you release your nger from the shutter button.
1 Lock the focus.
●With the shutter button pressed halfway,
press the [ ] button.
●The focus is now locked, and [ ] is
displayed.
●To unlock the focus, release the shutter
button and press the [ ] button again. In
this case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
2 Compose the shot and shoot.
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF)
Still Images Movies
You can shoot after the camera focuses on your selected subject,
person’s face, or location shown on the screen.
1 Choose a subject, a person’s face,
or a location to focus on.
●Touch the subject or person on the
screen.
●When the AF frame mode is set to
[ ], an AF frame is displayed where
you touched.
●When the AF frame mode is set to
[ ], [ ] will be displayed once
the subject is recognized (autofocus will
continue even if the subject moves). To
cancel Touch AF, touch [ ].
2 Shoot.
●Press the shutter button halfway. After
the camera focuses, a green [ ] will be
displayed.
●Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
●If you prefer the camera not to shoot when you touch the screen,
make sure [Touch Shutter] mode is deactivated. Go to the menu
(=
32), set [Touch Shutter] on the [ 1] tab, and then choose
[Disable].
●Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or
move too rapidly, or when there is inadequate contrast between
subjects and the background.
72
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●Once set to [SERVO AF], the camera focuses on the frame in the
center of the screen if it cannot detect a face when the shutter
button is pressed halfway down, even if [ +Tracking] is activated
(=
70).
●When servo AF is on, the exposure is not locked when you press
the shutter button halfway and is not determined until the moment
you shoot the picture, regardless of your current metering mode
(=
62) settings.
●If you attach a lens with “STM” in the name, turn on servo AF
for continual shooting (=
42) with constant focus adjustment.
Using this feature will reduce the continual shooting speed. If you
operate the zoom during continuous shooting, the focus may be
lost.
●With other lenses, the focus will be locked for the second and
subsequent frames during continuous shooting, resulting in
slower continuous shooting.
●Depending on the lens used, the distance to the subject and the
subject’s speed, the camera may not be able to achieve correct
focus.
●This can also be adjusted by going to the menu (=
32) and
choosing [AF operation] on the [ 2] tab.
Shooting with Servo AF
Still Images Movies
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
as you press the shutter button halfway.
1 Congure the setting.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [ONE
SHOT], and then choose [SERVO] on the
menu (=
32).
2 Focus.
●Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
A green AF frame will be displayed.
●Once the picture composition changes
or the subject moves, the AF frame turns
blue and adjusts the focus. When focus
is achieved, the AF frame will go back to
green.
●The camera may not be able to shoot a picture while focusing,
even if you press the shutter button all the way down. Continue to
hold down the shutter button while following your subject.
●If focus is not achieved, the AF frame will turn orange.
●AF lock shooting is not available.
●If you set the self-timer (=
40) to anything besides [ ], it is set
to [ONE SHOT].
73
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Fine-tuning Focus
Still Images Movies
If an EF-M lens is attached, you can use the lens’s focus ring to ne-tune
the focus after autofocus is complete.
1 Congure the settings.
●Press the [ ] button, choose
[AF+MF] on the [ 2] tab, and then
choose [On] (=
32).
2 Focus.
●Press the shutter button halfway to
autofocus and keep it halfway pressed.
3 Fine-tune the focus.
●Turn the lens focus ring to adjust the
focus.
●[MF] will ash in the display.
●Remove your nger from the shutter
button to cancel.
4 Shoot.
●Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
●This cannot be used with servo AF (=
72).
●This feature is not available when a non-EF-M lens is attached.
Changing the Focus Setting
Still Images Movies
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed.
Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the
shutter button halfway.
●Press the [ ] button, choose
[Continuous AF] on the [ 2] tab, and
then choose [On] (=
32).
On
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because
the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press
the shutter button halfway.
Off
Conserves battery power, because the camera does not
focus constantly. However, it may take longer than usual to
focus on the subject.
74
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
5 Focus.
●While looking at the magnied display,
turn the lens focusing ring to focus.
6 Shoot.
●If [Continuous AF] is set to [Off], you do not need to turn off the
camera when switching to [MF] when using a non-EF-M lens.
●You can drag the frame in step 3 to move the magnied display.
●You can also touch the [ ] on the bottom right to change the
magnication level or drag the screen to change the magnied
display position.
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
Still Images Movies
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge
detection as needed.
1 Access the setting screen.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [MF
Peaking Settings] on the [ 2] tab, and
then set [Peaking] to [On] (=
32).
2 Congure the setting.
●Choose a menu item to congure, and
then choose the desired option (=
32).
●Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
Still Images Movies
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. Magnifying
the screen display will make it easier to focus.
1 Choose [ ].
●Press the [ ] button if you have an EF-M
lens attached.
●If you have a non-EF-M lens, turn off the
camera, set the lens switch to [MF], and
then turn the camera back on.
●[MF] is displayed.
2 Display the magnifying frame.
●Press the [ ] button.
●The magnifying frame will appear in the
center of the screen. On the bottom right,
you will see a magnication ratio and the
area currently being magnied.
3 Select the area to magnify.
●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to move
the frame and select the area to magnify.
●Hold down the [ ] button for at least two
seconds to reset the frame to the center
of the screen.
4 Use the magnied display.
●Press the [ ] button or turn the
[ ][ ] dials to switch the overall
magnication between 1x (no
magnication), 5x, or 10x.
75
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Auto
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.
On
Fires for each shot.
Slow Synchro
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of ash range.
●In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should turn off image stabilization when using a tripod or
other means to secure the camera (=
78).
●In [ ] mode, even after the ash res, ensure that the main
subject does not move until the shutter sound is nished playing.
Off
For shooting without the ash.
Flash
Changing the Flash Mode
Still Images Movies
You can change the ash mode to match the shooting scene. For details
on the ash range, see “Internal Flash Range Guide” (=
196).
1 Raise the ash.
●Move the [ ] switch.
2 Congure the setting.
●Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
a ash mode, and then press the [ ]
button.
●The option you congured is now
displayed.
●The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ] button
when the ash is lowered. Move the [ ] switch to raise the ash
and then congure the setting.
●If the ash res, vignetting may occur. If the ash res, vignetting
may occur depending on the lens being used.
●When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically
adjusts the shutter speed or ISO speed during the ash shots
to reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure.
For this reason, when shooting with the ash, the shutter speed
or ISO speed displayed when you pressed the shutter button
halfway, may not match the actual shoot setting.
●This can also be congured by going to the menu (=
32),
choosing the [ 3] tab, and selecting [Flash ring] in the [Flash
Control] option.
76
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Shooting with the FE Lock
Still Images Movies
Just as with the AE lock (=
61), you can lock the exposure for ash
shots.
1 Raise the ash and set it to [ ]
(=
75).
2 Lock the ash exposure.
●Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked, and then press
the [ ] button.
●The ash res, and when
[] is displayed, the ash output level is
retained.
●Press the [ ] button again to cancel and
remove the [ ] icon.
3 Compose the shot and shoot.
●FE: Flash Exposure
●While in FE lock, a circle in the center of the screen shows the
current metering range.
●If standard exposure is not achieved even after the ash res in
step 2, [ ] ashes. Follow step 2 while the subject is within ash
range.
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
Still Images Movies
Just as with regular exposure compensation (=
61), you can adjust the
ash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.
●Raise the ash, press the [ ] button and
immediately turn the [ ] dial to choose
the compensation level, and then press
the [ ] button.
●The correction level you specied is now
displayed.
●You can congure the ash exposure compensation by accessing
MENU (=
32) and choosing [ 3] tab > [Flash Control] >
[Built-in ash settings] > [ exp. comp.].
●You can also access the [Flash Control] screen (=
32) as
follows.
- Press and hold the [ ] button for at least one second.
- When the ash is up, press the [ ] button and immediately
press the [ ] button.
●You can also access the [Flash Control] screen (=
32) by
pressing the [ ] button and touching [ ].
77
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Resetting Flash Settings
Still Images Movies
You can reset the [Built-in ash settings] to their defaults.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 3] tab, and select
[Clear settings].
●Choose [Clear built-in ash set.] and
press the [ ] button. On the next screen,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Changing the Flash Timing
Still Images Movies
Change the timing of the ash and shutter release as follows.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 3] tab, and select
[Built-in ash settings].
●Choose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose
the desired option (=
32).
1st curtain The ash res immediately after the shutter opens.
2nd curtain The ash res immediately before the shutter
closes.
●If the shutter speed is set to 1/100 or faster, the ash res on [1st
curtain], even if [2nd curtain] is selected.
Changing the Flash Metering Mode
Still Images Movies
When shooting with the ash, [Evaluative] is used for a standard ash
exposure. This metering method can be changed to average ash
metering mode across the overall ash region, such as when using an
externally metered ash.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 3] tab, select [E-TTL II
meter.], and then select [Average].
●When using [Average], adjust your ash metering compensation
for the scene to be shot.
78
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●Lenses with built-in image stabilization have “IS” in their names.
IS stands for Image Stabilizer.
Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size
Shown before Shooting
Still Images Movies
Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of signicant camera
shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before shooting, you can
choose not to reduce signicant camera shake.
●Follow the steps in “Changing the IS
Mode Settings” (=
78) to access the
[IS Settings] screen.
●Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
[2] (=
32).
●[Dynamic IS] is displayed only when using a lens that supports
dynamic image stabilization.
●You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded
at the same size shown before shooting.
Other Settings
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Still Images Movies
If you have an EF-M lens with an image stabilization function, image
stabilization can be adjusted in the menu.
1 Access the setting screen.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [IS
Settings] on the [ 2] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (=
32).
2 Congure the setting.
●Choose [IS Mode], and then choose the
desired option (=
32).
On
If using a lens with built-in image stabilization, the
camera compensates for camera movement and
hand shaking to stabilize the image when shooting.
Off Deactivates image stabilization.
●If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the
camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this
case, set [IS Mode] to [Off].
●[IS Mode] is not displayed when a non-EF-M lens is attached. Use
the image stabilization switch on the lens instead (=
22).
●Do not use image stabilization for bulb exposures. Doing so may
lead to incorrect image stabilization behavior.
79
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●Peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration
correction cannot be applied to JPEG images already taken.
●When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable]
is recommended, even if [Correction data available] is displayed.
●RAW images can be corrected with the Digital Photo Professional
software (=
158).
●Setting [Peripheral illumin.] to [Enable] may cause noise in the
image periphery, depending on shooting conditions.
●The effects of chromatic aberration correction cannot be
viewed on RAW images with the camera. Use the Digital Photo
Professional software (=
158) to view the correction instead.
●Your settings will be retained even after changing lenses, but no
correction will take place if no correction data has been added for
the new lens. If [Correction data not available] is displayed in step
2, use the EOS Utility software (=
158) to add lens correction
data to the camera.
●If the effect of the correction is not visible, magnify the image and
check it again.
●The corrections are also applied when an Extender or Life-size
Converter is attached.
●If the lens does not have distance information, the correction
amount will be lower.
●The correction amount applied with [Peripheral illumin.] will be
slightly lower than the maximum correction amount that can be
set with the Digital Photo Professional software.
●The higher the ISO speed, the lower the peripheral illumination
correction value will be.
Lens Peripheral Illumination/Chromatic
Aberration Correction
Still Images Movies
The unique properties of a lens may cause vignetting or color bleeding
around the contours of the subject. These phenomena can be corrected.
The camera comes with around 35 lenses worth of peripheral illumination/
chromatic aberration correction data. Use the EOS Utility software to view
the lens settings available; if your camera has no data for your lens, you
can add it to the camera. For details, refer to the EOS Utility instruction
manual (=
158).
* There is no need to add data for EF-M lenses.
1 Select [Lens aberration correction].
●Press the [ ] button and choose
[Lens aberration correction] on the [ 2]
tab, and choose the option (=
32).
2 Check if correction data is available.
●Conrm that [Correction data available] is
displayed for the attached lens.
3 Select the desired setting.
●Select the desired option and press the
[ ] button to set (=
31).
80
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●Unexpected results may occur if there is signicant misalignment
in the image due to camera shake. Securing the camera with a
tripod or other means is recommended.
●If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave
afterimages or the surrounding area of the subject may become
dark.
●Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the
image periphery.
●This cannot be used with AEB, [Long exp. noise reduction], during
RAW image shooting, or bulb shooting. If any of these is already
in use, [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] will not be available.
●Flash shooting is not possible.
●Recording the image to the card will take longer than with normal
shooting. You cannot take another picture until processing is
completed.
Changing the Noise Reduction Level
Still Images Movies
You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], [High], [Low].
This is particularly effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [High
ISO speed NR] on the [ 4] tab, and
then choose the desired option (=
32).
Using Multi Shot Noise Reduction
The camera can automatically shoot four pictures in a single shot and
combine the images to provide high-quality noise reduction, better than
the [High] selection for [High ISO speed NR].
1 Choose [ ].
●Follow the steps in “Changing Noise
Reduction Level” to select [ ].
2 Shoot.
●Press the shutter button all the way
down. The camera will take four pictures
and combine them, so keep your hands
steady while shooting.
81
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Reducing Noise at Slow Shutter Speeds
Still Images Movies
The camera can reduce the noise that occurs during long exposures at
shutter speeds of 1 second or slower.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [Long
exp. noise reduction] on the [ 4] tab,
and then choose the desired option
(=
32).
OFF (Disable)
Do not perform noise reduction during long exposures.
AUTO (Auto)
Perform noise reduction when noise is detected that is
specic to long exposures at shutter speeds of 1 second
or slower.
ON (Enable) Always perform noise reduction at shutter speeds of 1
second or slower.
●There may be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes images to reduce noise.
●Shooting pictures at a speed of ISO1600 or higher with this option
set to [ON] may result in grainier images than setting the option to
[OFF] or [AUTO].
82
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv]
Mode)
Still Images Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, see “Shutter” (=
192).
1 Enter [ ] mode.
●Set the mode dial to [ ].
2 Set the shutter speed.
●Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter
speed.
●If [Long exp. noise reduction] is set to [ON] or [AUTO] and
shooting is performed with a shutter speed of 1 second or slower,
there may be a delay before taking the next picture due to post-
shot noise reduction processing.
●When shooting at slow shutter speeds on a tripod, you should
turn off image stabilization (=
78).
●Maximum shutter speed with the ash is 1/200 second. If you
specify a faster speed, the camera will automatically reset the
speed to 1/200 second before shooting.
●Orange display of aperture values when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard
exposure. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (=
88).
●[]: Time value
5
Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and customize the camera for
your shooting style
●Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the respective
mode.
83
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Depth-of-Field Preview
The aperture is open when not shooting with the camera. Its size changes
only at the instant a picture is taken. As a result, the depth of eld may
look narrower (shallower) when viewed in the monitor. Add [ ] (Depth-of-
eld preview) to the buttons (=
89) and press the assigned button to
preview the depth of eld.
Specic Aperture Values ([Av]
Mode)
Still Images Movies
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
Aperture values allowed differ depending on the lens.
1 Enter [ ] mode.
●Set the mode dial to [ ].
2 Set the aperture value.
●Turn the [ ] dial to set the aperture
value.
●Orange display of shutter speeds when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard
exposure. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (=
88).
●Maximum shutter speed with the ash is 1/200 sec. When
shooting with the ash, the camera may automatically change the
dened aperture value to ensure the shutter speed is not faster
than 1/200 sec.
●[ ]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the
diaphragm in the lens)
84
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●After you set the shutter speed and aperture value, the exposure
level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.
●When the ISO speed is locked, screen brightness may change
depending on your specied shutter speed or aperture value.
However, screen brightness remains the same when the ash is
up and the mode is set to [ ].
●If ISO speed is set to [AUTO], the ISO speed setting changes to
suit the shutter speed and aperture in order to obtain a standard
exposure. As a result, you may not obtain the desired exposure
effect.
●The Auto Lighting Optimizer (=
64) may change the image
brightness. Press the [ ] button in the Auto Lighting
Optimizer settings screen and add a [ ] to the [Disable during
man expo] option to keep the Auto Lighting Optimizer in [ ]
mode xed to [Disable].
●[ ]: Manual
●Calculation of standard exposure is based on the specied
metering method (=
62).
●You can customize camera operation so that turning the [ ] dial
adjusts the shutter speed and turning the [ ] dial adjusts the
aperture value (=
89).
●The following actions are available when the ISO speed is set to
[AUTO].
- Use the exposure compensation dial to adjust the exposure.
- Press the [ ] button to lock the ISO speed and adjust the
screen brightness.
Specic Shutter Speeds and
Aperture Values ([M] Mode)
Still Images Movies
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed
and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.
For details on available shutter speeds, see “Shutter” (=
192). Aperture
values allowed will differ depending on the lens.
1 Enter [ ] mode.
●Set the mode dial to [ ].
2 Congure the setting.
●Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter
speed (1).
●Press the [ ] button to choose aperture
value (2) or ISO speed (3), and turn the
[ ] dial to specify a value.
●If the ISO speed is locked, an exposure
level mark (5) based on your specied
value is shown on the exposure level
indicator for comparison to the standard
exposure level (4). If deviation from the
standard exposure level exceeds two
stops, the exposure level indicator turns
into a [ ] or [ ].
●If ISO speed is set to [AUTO], pressing
the shutter button halfway will lock the
ISO speed and change the screen
brightness. If standard exposure cannot
be obtained with the dened shutter
speed and aperture value, the ISO speed
is displayed in orange.
85
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Adjusting the Flash Output
Still Images Movies
Choose from the three ash levels in [ ], [ ] and [ ] modes.
1 Set the ash mode to [Manual ash].
●Press the [ ] button and select
[Flash Control] on the [ 3] tab. Choose
[Built-in ash settings] and set the [Flash
Mode] to [Manual ash] (=
32).
2 Congure the settings.
●Raise the ash, press the [ ] button and
immediately turn the [ ] dial to choose
the ash level, and then press the [ ]
button.
●Once the setting is complete, the ash
output level is displayed.
[]: Minimum, [ ]: Medium, [ ]:
Maximum
●Flash levels can also be congured by going to the menu
(=
32), choosing the [ 3] tab, selecting [Built-in ash
settings] in the [Flash Control] option, and choosing [ ash
output].
●You can also access the [Flash Control] screen (=
32) as
follows.
-Press and hold the [ ] button for at least one second.
-When the ash is up, press the [ ] button and immediately
press the [ ] button.
●You can also access the [Flash Control] screen (=
32) by
pressing the [ ] button and touching [ ].
Long (Bulb) Exposures
A bulb exposure keeps the shutter open for as long as you hold down the
shutter button.
1 Activate bulb shooting.
●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Shutter
Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode)”
(=
84) and set the shutter speed to
[BULB].
2 Shoot.
●The exposure lasts as long as the shutter
button is pressed. The elapsed exposure
time will be displayed on the LCD monitor
during exposure.
●Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should turn off
image stabilization when using a tripod or other means to secure
the camera (=
78).
●Since bulb exposures produce more noise than usual, the image
may look grainy. There is a way to reduce noise in long exposures
when [Long exp. noise reduction] is set to [AUTO] or [ON]
(=
80).
●You can also use a Remote Controller (sold separately) for bulb
exposures (=
152).
●If the [Touch Shutter] is set to [Enable], touching the screen will
begin the exposure. Touch the screen again to end the exposure.
Be careful not to shake the camera when tapping the screen.
86
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●If the ISO speed is locked, an exposure level mark based on
your specied value is shown on the exposure level indicator for
comparison to the standard exposure level. If deviation from the
standard exposure level exceeds two stops, the exposure level
indicator turns into a [ ] or [ ].
●If the ISO speed is set to [AUTO], you can press the shutter
button halfway to view the current ISO speed. If standard
exposure cannot be obtained with the dened shutter speed
and aperture value, the exposure level mark moves to show the
deviation. The exposure level mark turns into a [ ] or [ ] when
deviation from the standard exposure level exceeds two stops.
●The ISO speed allowed will differ depending on the image quality.
ISO 100 – ISO 3200 with [ ], [ ] or [ ],
ISO 100 –ISO 6400 with [ ], [ ], [ ] or
[].
●Touch an option on the bottom of the screen and then touch
[][ ] to adjust its settings.
●Touch [ ] to lock the focus position. [ ] will be shown on the
screen.
Specic Shutter Speeds and
Aperture Values
Still Images Movies
Follow these steps to set your preferred shutter speed, aperture value
and ISO speed. For details on available shutter speeds, see “Shutter”
(=
192). Aperture values allowed differ depending on the lens.
1 Enter [ ] mode.
●Set the mode dial to [ ].
●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (=
31).
2 Congure the settings.
●Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter
speed.
●To set the aperture value and ISO speed,
press [ ], choose the desired option, and
then turn the [ ] dial to adjust the setting.
●You may see image icker while shooting under uorescent or
LED lighting, depending on the shutter speed.
●With a large aperture value, it may take longer to achieve focus,
or correct focus may not be achieved.
87
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Customizing Displayed Data
●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Customizing
Display Information” (=
87) to select
[Custom display 1] or [Custom display 2]
and then press the [ ] button.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the information to display
and then press the [ ] button to add a
[ ].
●Press the [ ] button to return to the
[Display switching] screen and check the
resulting display.
●Go to [Shooting information display] on the [ 1] tab and choose
[Grid display] to change to a ner grid.
●Go to [Shooting information display] on the [ 1] tab and choose
[Histogram] to change the displayed histogram from a brightness
histogram to an RGB histogram.
Customizing Controls and
Display
Customizing Display Information
You can dene which screens are shown when the [ ] button
is pressed in the shooting screen. You can also customize the data
displayed by the screens.
1 Access the setting screen.
●Choose the [ 1] tab, select [Shooting
information display], and then choose
[Display switching] and press the [ ]
button (=
31).
2 Congure the settings.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the screens you do not
want displayed and then press the [ ]
button to remove the [ ]. Press the [ ]
button again to add a [ ].
●To return to the menu screen, press the
[] button.
●Use the display sample on the left side of the screen to see what
your selected effect in step 2 will look like.
●You cannot remove all [ ] or add a [ ] only to [INFO. Quick
Control].
88
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Function
type Function Description
Exposure
ISO expansion
When set to [1:On], ISO speed
[H] is available for selection. In
ISO 25600-equivalent [ ] mode,
[H] is equivalent to ISO 6400
([ ], [ ] or [ ])
or ISO 12800 ([ ], [ ]
[ ] or [ ]).
Safety shift
When set to [1:On], if standard
exposure cannot be obtained with
the dened shutter speed and
aperture value in [ ] or [ ]
mode, the camera automatically
changes the shutter speed and
aperture value in order to get
closer to the standard exposure.
Autofocus AF-assist beam
(LED) ring
When set to [1:Disable], the AF-
assist beam will not re.
Others
Custom Controls
Add frequently used functions
to the front dial, control dial, and
buttons (=
89).
Release shutter
w/o lens
When set to [1:Enable], you can
press the shutter button all the
way or press the movie button to
record images, even if there is no
lens attached to the camera.
Retract lens on
power off
Dene whether to automatically
retract the lens when the camera
is turned off.
Setting Up Advanced Camera Functions
The [ 1] tab of the menu (=
32) lets you customize various camera
functions to suit your picture-taking preferences. Frequently used
functions can also be added to the front dial, control dial, and buttons.
1 Select a function type.
●Press the [ ] button and choose
the [ 1] tab (=
32).
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose the function type
(Exposure, AF, Other), and then press the
[ ] button.
2 Select the desired function.
●If you selected Exposure or Others, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ][ ]
dials to select a function and then press
the [ ] button.
3 Choose an option.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
●Press the [ ] button to return to the
menu screen.
89
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●If adding a function to the [ ] button,
[ ] ([ ] button), or movie button, press
the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ][ ] dials to select the function.
●Press the [ ] button to return to the
previous menu screen.
Shutter button / [ ]
button
Set to [AE/AF, no AE lock], and you can
press the [ ] button to focus. In this case,
AE lock is not applied when the [ ] button is
pressed. Using the touch shutter, the camera
takes a picture without focusing.
[] / [ ] dials
Set to [Av/Tv], and you can use the [ ]
dial to adjust the aperture value and the [ ]
dial to adjust the shutter speed in [ ] mode.
[] button Pressing the button will trigger the assigned
action.
[] ([ ] button)
Movie button
●Choose [Clear All Custom Func. (C.Fn)] in step 1 and press the
[] button to remove all the changed functions on the [ 1] tab
and restore it to default.
●Even with [ISO expansion] set to [1:On], [H] cannot be selected if
[Highlight tone priority] is set to [D+] (=
64).
●Safety shift is disabled when the ash res.
●The AF-assist beam is light from the lamp (front) that turns on
when the shutter button is pressed halfway in dark areas to help
with focusing.
●[Retract lens on power off] is supported by the following lens.
- EF 40mm f/2.8 STM
- EF-S 24mm f/2.8 STM
Adding Functions to Buttons and Dials
You can change the function of the shutter / [ ] button or [ ] / [ ]
dial, as well as add frequently used functions to the [ ], [ ] ([ ]), and
movie buttons.
1 Access the function assignment
screen.
●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Setting Up
Advanced Camera Functions” (=
88)
and choose [Custom Controls] from
[Other].
2 Assign functions to controls.
●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ][ ] dials to select the dial or
button to assign a function to, and then
press the [ ] button.
●If changing the function of the shutter /
[] button or [ ] / [ ] dial, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
select the function.
90
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Saving Shooting Settings ([C] Mode)
Still Images Movies
Save commonly used shooting modes and your congured function
settings for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode
dial to [ ]. Even settings that are usually cleared when you switch
shooting modes or turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings) can be
retained this way.
Settings that can be saved
●Shooting modes ([ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ])
●Items set in [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes (=
61 – =
84)
●Shooting menu settings
●My Menu settings (=
91)
1 Enter a shooting mode with settings
you want to save, and change the
settings as desired.
2 Access the Register Settings
screen.
●Press the [ ] button, choose
[Custom shooting mode (C)] on the [ 4]
tab, and then press the [ ] button.
3 Register.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Register settings], and
then press the [ ] button.
●A conrmation screen will appear. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to select [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
●To restore the [ ] button, [ ]([ ]) button, and movie button
to their defaults, choose [ ], [ ] and [ ] respectively.
●If you don’t want to add functions to the [ ] button,
[]([ ]) button, and movie button, choose [ ], [ ] and [ ]
respectively.
●Icons labeled with [ ] in the [ ] button, [ ]([ ]) button and
movie button assignment screen indicate that the function is not
available in the current shooting mode or under current function
conditions.
●Assign [ ] to a button, and every time the button is pressed, the
camera will switch between saving or not saving simultaneous
RAW images.
●Assign [ ] to a button, and the camera will use the dened
aperture value while the button is pressed, letting you preview the
depth of eld.
●Assign [ ] to a button, and the screen display will disappear
when the button is pressed. Perform one of the following actions
to restore the display.
- Press a button other than the power button
- Turn the exposure compensation dial, mode dial, or [ ][ ]
dials
- Change the camera’s vertical/horizontal orientation
- Open or close the ash
- Open the LCD monitor and rotate it upward all the way, or close
the LCD monitor when rotated upward all the way
91
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)
Still Images Movies
You can save up to six commonly used shooting menu items on the
[ 1] tab. By customizing the [ 1] tab, you can access to these items
quickly from a single screen.
1 Access the setting screen.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [My
Menu settings] on the [ 1] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (=
32).
2 Congure the setting.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Select items], and then
press the [ ] button.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a menu item to save (max.
six items) and then press the [ ] button
to save it.
●[] is displayed.
●To cancel saving, press the [ ] button.
[ ] is no longer displayed.
●Press the [ ] button.
●To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose [ ],
change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These setting
details are not applied in other shooting modes.
●To reset saved settings to their defaults, choose [Clear settings]
in step 2, press the [ ] button, and then choose [OK] and press
the [ ] button.
92
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
3 Rearrange menu items as needed.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Sort], and then press the
[ ] button.
●Choose a menu item to move (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to change the order, and then press
the [ ] button.
●Press the [ ] button.
●Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specied, but they may
not be available in some shooting modes.
●To make My Menu immediately accessible by pressing the
[] button in Shooting mode, choose [Set default view] to
choose [Yes].
●On the [Select items] screen for saving or clearing items, you can
also touch items to select them.
●On the [Sort] screen, you can also drag items to change the
display order.
93
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Viewing
Still Images Movies
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1 Enter Playback mode.
●Press the [ ] button.
●Your last shot is displayed.
2 Choose images.
●To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
[ ] dial clockwise.
●Press and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
●To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), turn the [ ] dial rapidly. In this
mode, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to browse through images.
●To return to single-image display, press
the [ ] button.
●To browse images grouped by shooting
date, press the [ ][ ] buttons in Scroll
Display mode.
●Movies are identied by a [ ] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
6
Playback Mode
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them in many ways
●To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [ ] button to
enter Playback mode.
●It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were
renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other
cameras.
94
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Touch-Screen Operations
●To view the next image, drag right to
left across the screen, and to view the
previous image, drag left to right.
●To access Scroll Display mode, quickly
drag left or right repeatedly.
●You can also choose images in Scroll
Display mode by dragging left or right.
●Touching the central image will restore
single-image display.
●To browse images grouped by shooting
date in Scroll Display mode, drag up or
down.
●To start movie playback, touch [ ] in step
3 of “Viewing” (=
94).
●To adjust the volume during movie
playback, quickly drag up or down across
the screen.
3 Play movies.
●To start playback, press the [ ] button,
press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button again.
4 Adjust the volume.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the
volume.
●To adjust the volume when the volume
indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons.
5 Pause playback.
●To pause or resume playback, press the
[ ] button.
●After the movie is nished, [ ] is
displayed.
●To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
●To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU (=
32), > [ 3]
tab > [Scroll Display] > [Off].
●To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
mode, choose MENU (=
32), > [ 3] tab, > [Resume] > [Last
shot].
●To change the transition shown between images, access MENU
(=
32), and choose your desired effect on the [ 3] tab >
[Transition Effect].
95
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Switching Display Modes
Press the [ ] button in playback mode to switch between no
information display, information display 1 (basic info), and information
display 2 (details).
●Switching display modes is not possible while the camera is
connected via Wi-Fi to devices other than printers.
Dening Displayed Shooting Data
You can set up the screens to display the information you want. For details
on the information displayed on each screen, see “Playback” (=
175).
1 Access the setting screen.
●Select [Playback information display] on
the [ 4] tab and press the [ ] button.
2 Select the information to display.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the info you want displayed
and then press the [ ] button to add a
[ ].
●To return to the menu screen, press the
[] button.
●Use the display sample on the left side of the screen to see what
your selected effect in step 2 will look like.
●Place a [ ] on [Info display 2] to display settings info from [ ]
mode. When you press the [ ] button, you will see [ ]
settings, followed by [Info Display 2].
●To stop movie playback, touch the
screen. This screen is displayed, and the
camera is ready for your next operation.
- Touch [ ] to display the volume panel,
and then touch [ ][ ] to adjust the
volume.
- To switch frames, touch the scrollbar or
drag left or right.
- To resume playback, touch [ ].
- Touch [ ] to return to the screen in
step 2 of “Viewing” (=
93).
96
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
Still Images Movies
View digest movies recorded automatically in [ ] mode (=
37) on a
day of still image shooting as follows.
1 Choose an image.
●Still images shot in [ ] mode are
labeled with a [ ] icon.
●Choose a still image labeled with
[] and press the [ ] button.
2 Play the movie.
●Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[] in the menu (=
31).
●The movie recorded automatically on the
day of still image shooting is played back,
from the beginning.
●After a moment, [ ] will no longer be displayed when
you are using the camera with information display deactivated
(=
95).
●You can also play digest movies by touching [ ] on the
screen in step 1 and touching [ ] on the screen in step 2.
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
Still Images Movies
Washed-out highlights in the image ash on the screen in info displays 2
to 6 (=
95).
Brightness Histogram
Still Images Movies
●The graph displayed on the top of
information displays 2-6 is a histogram
that shows the distribution of brightness
in the image. The horizontal axis
represents the degree of brightness, and
the vertical axis, how much of the image
is at each level of brightness. Viewing the
histogram is a way to check exposure.
RGB Histogram
Still Images Movies
●Information display 3 displays an RGB
histogram that shows the distribution
of shades of red, green, and blue in an
image. The horizontal axis represents R,
G, or B brightness, and the vertical axis,
how much of the image is at that level
of brightness. Viewing this histogram
enables you to check image color
characteristics.
●Choose info displays 2 – 6 from the [Playback information display]
screen on the [ 4] tab, press the [ ] button, press the
[][ ] buttons to choose [RGB], and then press the [ ] button.
The brightness histogram will then be displayed on the bottom of
info display 3.
●The histogram can also be accessed while shooting (=
174).
97
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Browsing and Filtering Images
Navigating through Images in an Index
Still Images Movies
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly nd the images
you are looking for.
1 Display images in an index.
●Press the [ ] button to display images
in an index. Press it again to increase the
number of images shown.
●To display fewer images, press the [ ]
button. Fewer images are shown with
each press.
2 Choose an image.
●Turn the [ ] dial to scroll through the
images.
●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image.
●An orange frame is displayed around the
selected image.
●Press the [ ] button to view the selected
image in single-image display.
●To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the
[][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial rapidly), choose MENU
(=
32) > [ 3] tab > [Index Effect] > [Off].
Viewing by Date
Digest movies can be viewed by date.
1 Choose a movie.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [List/
Play Digest Movies] on the [ 1] tab,
and then choose a date (=
32).
2 Play the movie.
●Press the [ ] button to start playback.
98
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions
Still Images Movies
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by ltering
image display according to your specied conditions. You can also protect
(=
102) or delete (=
105) these images all at once.
Rating Displays images with dened ratings (=
108).
Shot Date Displays the images shot on a specic date.
People Displays images with detected faces.
Still image/
Movie
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in
[] mode (=
37).
1 Choose the rst condition for image
display or navigation.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, press the [ ] button, and then
press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
condition.
●If you chose [ ], press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to display the
ltered images. To perform an action for
all of these images together, press the
[ ] button and go to step 3.
2 Choose the second condition and
check the images found.
●If you selected [ ], [ ] or [ ] for your
rst condition, press the [ ][ ] buttons to
select a second condition and then turn
the [ ] dial to view the images found.
●To switch to ltered image display, press
the [ ] button and go to step 3.
Touch-Screen Operations
●Pinch in to switch from single-image
display to index display.
●To view more thumbnails per screen,
pinch in again.
●Drag up or down on the screen to scroll
through displayed images.
●To view fewer thumbnails per screen,
spread your ngers apart.
●Touch an image to choose it, and touch it
again to view it in single-image display.
99
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Using the Front Dial to Jump between Images
Displays images with dened ratings
(=
108).
Jumps to the rst image in each group of
images that were shot on the same date.
Jumps by 10 images at a time.
Jumps by 100 images at a time.
1 Choose a condition.
●Choose a condition (or jump method)
in single-image display by turning the
[] dial and then pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons.
2 View images matching your
specied condition, or jump by the
specied amount.
●Turn the [ ] dial to view only images
matching the condition or jump by the
specied number of images forward or
back.
●[ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] are displayed when there are
images for each corresponding rating. [ ] and [ ] are displayed
whenever there are any images with ratings applied to them.
●[] allows you to jump to the Favorites screen with all ratings
displayed.
●Turning the [ ] dial when browsing images in index display
will jump to the previous or next image according to the jump
method chosen in single-image display. However, if you have
chosen [ ] or [ ], the jump method will be switched to [ ].
3 View the ltered images.
●Images matching your conditions are
displayed in yellow frames. To view only
these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial.
●To leave the ltered image display, press
the [ ] button, select [ ] from the
menu, and then press the [ ] button.
●When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available.
●To hide or view other information, press the [ ] button in
step 2.
●Options for viewing the images found (in step 3) include
“Navigating through Images in an Index” (=
97), “Magnifying
Images” (=
100), and “Viewing Slideshows” (=
101). You can
also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing
[Protect All Images in Search] in “Protecting Images” (=
102),
“Erasing Multiple Images at Once” (=
105), “Adding Images to
the Print List (DPOF)” (=
164), or [Select All Images in Search]
in “Adding Images to a Photobook” (=
166).
●If you edit images and save them as new images (=
109 –
=
112), a message is displayed, and the images that were
found are no longer shown.
●Press the [ ] button and select [Image Search] on the
[1] tab for the same function.
●You can also choose conditions by touching the screens in steps
1 and 2.
100
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Image Viewing Options
Magnifying Images
Still Images Movies
1 Magnify an image.
●Pressing the [ ] button will zoom in and
magnify the image. You can magnify
images up to about 10x by continuing to
hold the button down.
●The approximate position of the displayed
area (1) is shown for reference.
●To zoom out, press the [ ] button. You
can return to single-image display by
continuing to hold it.
2 Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
●To move the display position, press
the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons. Press [ ] to
move to the focus frame area used when
shooting.
●To switch to other images while zoomed,
turn the [ ] dial.
●You can return to single-image display from magnied display by
pressing the [ ] button.
●Go to [Magnify (approx.)] on the [ 4] tab of the menu to dene
the magnication used when pressing the [ ] button during
single-image display. If set to [Reuse last magnication], the
display will be magnied to the level before the [ ] button
was pressed in the previous magnied image.
Touch-Screen Operations
●You can also jump to the previous or next
image according to your jump method
chosen in step 1 of “Using the Front Dial
to Jump between Images” (=
99) by
dragging left or right with two ngers.
101
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Viewing Slideshows
Still Images Movies
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows.
●Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Slideshow] on the [ 1] tab
(=
32).
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Start], and then press the
[ ] button.
●The slideshow will start after [Loading
image] is displayed for a few seconds.
●Press the [ ] button to stop the
slideshow.
●The camera’s power-saving functions (=
28) are deactivated
during slideshows.
●To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button.
●You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the
[][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. For fast-forward or fast-
rewind, hold the [ ][ ] buttons down.
●Choose [Set up] and press the [ ] button to set up slideshows
to repeat, change the transitions between images, and adjust the
display duration of each image (=
32).
●You can also stop slideshows by touching the screen.
Touch-Screen Operations
●Spread your ngers apart (pinch out) to
zoom in.
●You can magnify images up to about 10x
by repeating this action.
●To move the display position, drag across
the screen.
●Pinch in to zoom out.
●Touch [ ] to restore single-image
display.
102
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Using the Menu
1 Access the setting screen.
●Press the [ ] button and choose
[Protect] on the [ 1] tab (=
32).
2 Choose a selection method.
●Choose an option as desired (=
32).
●To return to the menu screen, press the
[] button.
Protecting Images
Still Images Movies
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure (=
105).
●Press the [ ] button, select
[ ] from the menu, and then use the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
select [ ]. This will display the [ ]
icon.
●Press the [ ] button again to remove the
[ ] icon and unprotect the image.
●Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format
the card (=
138).
●Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure
function. To erase them this way, rst cancel protection.
103
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Selecting a Range
1 Choose [Select Range].
●Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”
(=
102), choose [Select Range] and
press the [ ] button.
2 Choose a starting image.
●Press the [ ] button.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
Choosing Images Individually
1 Choose [Select].
●Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”
(=
102), choose [Select] and press the
[ ] button.
2 Choose an image.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
●To cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
●Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3 Protect the image.
●Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
●Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or
turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in step 3.
●You can also select or clear images by touching the screen in
step 2, and you can access the conrmation screen by touching
[].
●You can also protect images by touching [OK] on the screen in
step 3.
104
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Protecting All Images at Once
1 Choose [Protect All Images].
●Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”
(=
102), choose [Protect All Images]
and press the [ ] button.
2 Protect the images.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Clearing All Protection at Once
You can clear protection from all images at once.
To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting
All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2.
3 Choose an ending image.
●Press the [ ] button to choose [Last
image], and then press the [ ] button.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
●Images before the rst image cannot be
selected as the last image.
4 Protect the images.
●Press the [ ] button to choose [Protect],
and then press the [ ] button.
●You can also choose the rst or last image by turning the [ ] dial
when the top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed.
●To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in
step 4.
●You can also display the screen for choosing the rst or last
image by touching an image on the top screen in steps 2 or 3.
●You can also protect images by touching [Protect] on the screen
in step 4.
105
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Erasing Multiple Images at Once
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected
images (=
102) cannot be erased.
Choosing a Selection Method
1 Access the setting screen.
●Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Erase] on the [ 1] tab
(=
32).
2 Choose a selection method.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a selection method, and
then press the [ ] button.
●To return to the menu screen, press the
[] button.
Choosing Images Individually
1 Choose [Select].
●Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (=
105), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
2 Choose an image.
●Once you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
(=
103), [ ] is displayed.
●To cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
Erasing Images
Still Images Movies
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,
protected images (=
102) cannot be erased.
1 Choose an image to erase.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
2 Erase the image.
●Press the [ ] button.
●After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
●The current image is now erased.
●To cancel erasure, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
●Press the [ ] button when displaying an image with both RAW
and JPEG les to select between [Erase ], [Erase JPEG] or
[Erase + JPEG]. Select your preferred option to erase the les.
●You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the
screen in step 2.
106
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Selecting a Range
1 Choose [Select Range].
●Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (=
105), choose [Select
Range] and press the [ ] button.
2 Choose images.
●Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(=
103) to specify images.
3 Erase the images.
●Press the [ ] button to choose [Erase],
and then press the [ ] button.
Specifying All Images at Once
1 Choose [Select All Images].
●Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (=
105), choose [Select All
Images] and press the [ ] button.
2 Erase the images.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
●Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3 Erase the image.
●Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
●If you select an image with both RAW and JPEG les, both will
be erased.
107
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Using the Menu
1 Choose [Rotate].
●Press the [ ] button and choose
[Rotate] on the [ 1] tab (=
32).
2 Rotate the image.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
●Press the [ ] button to rotate the image
90° clockwise. Press it again to rotate it
90° counterclockwise, and press it a third
time to restore the image to normal.
●To return to the menu screen, press the
[] button.
●On the screen in step 2, you can also touch [ ] to rotate
images or touch [ ] to return to the menu screen.
Rotating Images
Still Images Movies
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
1 Choose [ ].
●Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (=
31).
2 Rotate the image.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to select [ ] or [ ] and rotate the
image 90° in the specied direction.
Press the [ ] button to conrm the
rotation.
●Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off]
(=
108).
108
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Applying Ratings
Still Images Movies
You can organize images by giving them ratings (levels). These levels run
between [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] and [ ]. By choosing a rating, you
can restrict the following operations to all images with the same rating.
●“Viewing” (=
93), “Viewing Slideshows” (=
101), “Protecting
Images” (=
102), “Erasing Images” (=
105), “Adding Images to
the Print List (DPOF)” (=
164), “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(=
166)
●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then assign a rating (=
31).
●To remove ratings, repeat this process
but choose [ ] and then press the [ ]
button.
Using the Menu
1 Choose [Rating].
●Press the [ ] button and choose
[Rating] on the [ 1] tab (=
32).
2 Choose image and rating.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a rating.
Deactivating Auto Rotation
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates
images based on the current camera orientation.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [Auto
Rotate] on the [ 3] tab, and then
choose [Off] (=
32).
●Images cannot be rotated (=
107) when you set [Auto Rotate]
to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in
the original orientation.
109
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Editing Still Images
●Image editing (=
109 – =
112) is only available when the
memory card has sufcient free space.
●When [ ] is shown on a screen, you can touch [ ]
instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.
●When [ ] is shown on a screen, you can touch [ ]
instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.
Resizing Images
Still Images Movies
Save a copy of images at a lower number of recording pixels.
1 Choose an image size.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose a size (=
31).
●Press the [ ] button.
2 Save the new image.
●After [Save new image?] is displayed,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
3 Finish the setup process.
●Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
●Images will not be rated if you switch to Shooting mode or turn the
camera off before nishing the setup process in step 3.
●In step 2, you can also rate images by touching the [ ][ ]
buttons.
110
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Cropping
Still Images Movies
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image le.
1 Access the setting screen.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then press the [ ] button
(=
31).
2 Set the cropping frame size,
position, and aspect ratio.
●Press the [ ] or [ ] button to change
the size of the frame.
●Use the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to move
the frame.
●To change the orientation of the frame,
turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ] and press
the [ ] button.
●To change the frame’s aspect ratio,
turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ].
The aspect ratio will switch between
([ ][ ][ ][ ]) with each press of the
[ ] button.
3 Check the cropped image.
●Turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ].
●Press [ ] to toggle the screen between
the cropped image and the cropping
frame display.
3 Review the new image.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
[ ] button.
●The saved image is now displayed.
●Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting
of [ ] (=
43).
●RAW images cannot be edited.
●In step 1, choose [ ] to stop resizing the image.
●Images cannot be resized to a higher number of recording pixels.
Using the Menu
1 Choose [Resize].
●Press the [ ] button and choose
[Resize] on the [ 2] tab (=
32).
2 Choose an image.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3 Choose an image size.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the size, and then press
the [ ] button.
4 Save as a new image and review.
●Follow step 2 in “Resizing Images”
(=
109).
●Press the [ ] button, and then
follow step 3 in “Resizing Images”
(=
109).
111
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Applying Filter Effects
You can apply the effects of the following shooting modes to an image and
save it as a new image: [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ].
1 Select the effect type.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose an effect type
(=
31).
●Press the [ ] button.
2 Congure details.
●For [ ] mode, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to adjust the contrast.
●For [ ] mode, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to adjust blurring.
●For [ ] or [ ] modes, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to adjust the
strength of the effect.
●For [ ] mode, press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial to adjust the intensity
of the colors.
●For [ ] mode, press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial to adjust the color
tone.
●For [ ], press the [ ] button to
resize the frame and press the [ ][ ]
buttons to move it.
4 Save as a new image and review.
●Turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
●Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Resizing Images”
(=
109).
●Editing is not possible for images shot at [ ] resolution.
●RAW images cannot be edited.
●You cannot crop an image that has already been cropped.
●You cannot apply a Creative lter or resizing to a cropped image.
●Cropped images will have a lower number of recording pixels than
uncropped images.
●In step 3, while the cropped image is displayed, you can still
change the crop position, size and aspect ratio.
●Step 2 can also be performed by pressing the [ ] button,
choosing [Cropping] on the [ 2] tab, pressing the [ ] button,
selecting an image and pressing [ ] again.
●In step 2, you can move the frame by dragging it around the
screen. Pinch or spread out your ngers (=
101) to change the
size of the frame.
●In step 2, you can also touch [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] on the
screen.
112
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
3 Correct the image.
●Press the [ ] button.
●Red-eye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed
around corrected image areas.
●Enlarge or reduce images as needed.
Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images”
(=
100).
4 Save as a new image and review.
●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
●The image is now saved as a new le.
●Press the [ ] button, and then
follow step 3 in “Resizing Images”
(=
109).
●Some images may not be corrected accurately.
●To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be
erased.
●Protected images cannot be overwritten.
●RAW images cannot be edited this way.
●Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images saved with
RAW images, but the original image cannot be overwritten.
●You can save images by touching [New File] or [Overwrite] on the
screen in step 4.
3 Save as a new image and review.
●Press the [ ] button.
●Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Resizing Images”
(=
109).
●To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical in [ ] mode,
press the [ ][ ] buttons in step 2. To move the frame, press the
[][ ] buttons again. To return the frame to horizontal orientation,
press the [ ][ ] buttons.
●This can also be done by pressing the [ ] button, selecting
[Creative lters] on the [ 1] tab, selecting an image and
pressing the [ ] button.
●In step 1, choose [ ] to not apply an effect to the image.
●In step 2, you can also touch and drag the bar across the bottom
of the screen to edit images. You can also move the frame by
touching or dragging across the screen in [ ] mode.
Correcting Red-Eye
Still Images Movies
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the
corrected image as a separate le.
1 Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
●Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [ 2]
tab (=
32).
2 Choose an image.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
113
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●To cancel editing, press the [ ]
button, choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button again.
4 Save the edited movie.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
●Choose [Save w/o Comp.], and then
press the [ ] button.
●The movie is now saved as a new le.
●To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be
erased.
●If the memory card lacks sufcient space, only [Overwrite] will be
available.
●Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving
is in progress.
●When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack
or an AC adapter kit (sold separately, =
148).
Editing Movies
Still Images Movies
You can remove unneeded portions from the beginning and end of movies
(excluding digest movies, =
37).
1 Choose [ ].
●Following steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”
(=
93), choose [ ] and press the [ ]
button.
●The movie editing panel and editing bar
are now displayed.
2 Specify portions to cut.
●(1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is
the editing bar.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ]
or [ ].
●To view the portions you can cut
(identied by [ ] on the screen), press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
move [ ]. Cut the beginning of the movie
(from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and cut the
end of the movie by choosing [ ].
●If you move [ ] to a position other than a
[ ] mark, in [ ] the portion before the
nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut,
while in [ ] the portion after the nearest
[ ] mark on the right will be cut.
3 Review the edited movie.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button. The edited
movie is now played.
●To edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
114
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Reducing File Sizes
Movie le sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.
●On the screen in step 2 of “Editing
Movies”, choose [ ]. Choose [New File],
and then press the [ ] button.
●Choose [Compress & Sav.], and then
press the [ ] button.
Image quality after compression is as follows.
Pre-compression Post-compression
●[ ] and [ ] movies cannot be compressed.
●Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you
choose [Overwrite].
●However, you can compress and save edited movies as new les
by choosing [Compress & Sav.].
Editing Digest Movies
Still Images Movies
Individual chapters (clips) (=
37) recorded in [ ] mode can be
erased as needed. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot be
recovered.
1 Select the clip to erase.
●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Viewing Short
Movies Created When Shooting Still
Images (Digest Movies)” (=
96) to
play a movie created in [ ] mode, and
then press the [ ] button to access the
movie control panel.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ] or [ ], and then press
the [ ] button.
2 Choose [ ].
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
●The selected clip is played back
repeatedly.
3 Conrm erasure.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
●The clip is erased, and the short movie is
overwritten.
●[ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is
connected to a printer.
115
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Available Wi-Fi Features
You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by
connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi.
Smartphones and tablet devices *1
●Importing images (=
116)
●Remote shooting (=
133)
(CANON iMAGE GATEWAY *2)
Web services
●Saving and sharing images (=
122)
●Sending to PC (=
131)
Canon Wi-Fi-compatible
cameras
●Converting images
(=
129)
Printer *3
●Printing images (=
127) DLNA-compatible media
players *4
●Viewing images (=
126)
*1 For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets and other compatible
devices are referred to collectively as “smartphones”.
*2 CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is Canon’s online photo service.
*3 The printer must support PictBridge (supporting DPS over IP), which allows
direct photo printing via Wi-Fi.
*4 DLNA stands for Digital Living Network Alliance.
7
Wi-Fi Functions
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety of compatible
devices, and use the camera with Web services
●Before using the Wi-Fi function, ensure that you read the “Wi-Fi
(Wireless LAN) Precautions” (=
200).
116
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
2 Establish the connection.
●Touch the N-Mark ( ) on the smartphone
with EOS Remote installed against the
camera’s N-Mark.
●The camera starts up automatically.
●When the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ] button. Use the
keyboard (=
33) to enter a nickname,
then press the [ ] button to return
to the [Device Nickname] screen.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
●EOS Remote starts up on the
smartphone and automatically connects
to the camera.
3 Adjust the privacy setting.
●When this screen is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [All images], and then press the
[ ] button.
●After a connection is established with
the smartphone, this screen will close in
about one minute.
4 Import images.
●Use the smartphone to import images
from the camera to the smartphone.
Importing Images into a Smartphone
There are the following two ways to import images from the camera into a
smartphone.
●Connect via NFC (=
116)
Simply touch an NFC-compatible Android smartphone (OS version 4.0
or later) against the camera to connect the devices.
●Connect via the Wi-Fi menu (=
118)
Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone
Use an Android (OS version 4.0 or later) smartphone’s NFC to simplify the
process of installing EOS Remote and connecting to the camera.
●If the camera is off or in Shooting mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and transfer images from the camera to the
smartphone. Once the devices are connected, you can also shoot
remotely (=
133). It’s easy to reconnect to recent devices, which are
listed in the Wi-Fi menu.
●If the camera is in Playback mode when the devices are touched
together, images appear in index display. You can choose and send
images on the image selection screen.
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in
Shooting Mode
1 Install EOS Remote.
●Activate NFC on the smartphone and
touch the device against the camera’s
N-Mark ( ) to start Google Play on the
smartphone automatically. Once the EOS
Remote download page is displayed,
download and install the app.
117
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback
Mode
●Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
●Touch the smartphone with EOS Remote
installed (=
119) against the camera’s
N-Mark ( ).
●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, and then press the [ ]
button. [ ] is displayed.
●To cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
●Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
●After you nish choosing images, press
the [ ] button.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
●The images are sent.
●To disconnect, remove the [ ] mark from
all the images, press the [ ] button,
and then press [ ][ ] to choose [OK].
●If during connection a message on the camera or smartphone
requests you to enter the nickname, follow step 2 in “Connecting
via NFC When Camera Is Off or in Shooting Mode” (=
116) to
enter it.
●The camera does not keep a record of smartphones you connect
to via NFC in Playback mode.
●When using NFC, keep the following points in mind.
- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone. This
may damage the devices.
- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize
each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices
together in slightly different positions. If connection fails, keep
the devices together until the camera screen is updated.
- Do not place other objects between the camera and
smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or
similar accessories may block communication.
●Select [All images] in step 3 when shooting remotely.
●All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [All images] in step 3. Select
another option in step 3 to place restrictions on camera images
viewable from the smartphone (=
135). Once you have
registered a smartphone, you can change privacy settings for it
on the camera (=
135).
●When the mode dial is set to [ ], a smartphone cannot be
connected.
●Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
●A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [ ] button and enter a different
nickname.
118
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
4 Choose [Add a Device].
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
●The camera’s SSID and password are
displayed.
5 Connect the smartphone to the
network.
●In the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
●In the password eld, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
6 Start EOS Remote.
●Start EOS Remote on the smartphone.
7 Select the camera.
●A screen appears on the smartphone that
lets you select which camera to connect
to. Select the camera to begin pairing.
Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu
Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated
“EOS Remote” app on the smartphone. For details on this application
(supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon
website.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (=
119).
1 Install the dedicated app.
●For Android smartphones, nd EOS
Remote in Google Play and download
and install the app.
●For an iPhone or iPad, nd EOS Remote
in the App Store and download and install
the app.
2 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
●Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
●Press the [ ] button.
●When the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ] button. Use the
keyboard (=
33) to enter a nickname,
and then press the [ ] button to
return to the [Device Nickname] screen.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
3 Choose [ ].
●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press
the [ ] button.
119
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
●A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [ ] button and enter a different
nickname.
●To connect without entering a password in step 5, go to the menu
(=
32), choose the [ 4] tab, and set [Password] to [Off] in [Wi-
Fi Settings]. [Password] is no longer displayed in the SSID display
screen (step 4).
●If you have previously connected to devices, recent destinations
will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu. You can easily
connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a new device,
display the device selection screen by touching [ ][ ], and then
congure the setting.
●If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(=
32) > [ 4] tab > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Target History] > [Off].
Using Another Access Point
You can also use an existing access point when connecting the camera to
a smartphone through the Wi-Fi menu.
Also refer to the access point user manual.
8 Adjust the privacy setting.
●When this screen is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [All images], and then press the
[ ] button.
●After a connection is established with
the smartphone, this screen will close in
about one minute.
9 Import images.
●Use the smartphone to import images
from the camera to the smartphone.
●Select [All images] in step 8 when shooting remotely.
●All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [All images] in step 8. Select
another option in step 8 to place restrictions on camera images
viewable from the smartphone (=
135). Once you have
registered a smartphone, you can change privacy settings for it
on the camera (=
135).
●When the mode dial is set to [ ], a smartphone cannot be
connected.
120
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Conguration Method or PIN
Method for settings on a WPS supported device.
1 Connect the smartphone to the
access point.
2 Prepare for the connection.
●Follow steps 1 – 4 in “Adding a
Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”
(=
118) to access the [Waiting to
connect] screen.
3 Choose [Switch Network].
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Switch Network], and
then press the [ ] button.
●A list of detected access points will be
displayed.
4 Choose [WPS Connection].
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [WPS Connection], and
then press the [ ] button.
5 Choose [PBC Method].
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [PBC Method], and then
press the [ ] button.
Conrming Access Point Compatibility
Conrm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi
standards in “Wi-Fi” (=
194).
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point
supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS, =
120) or not (=
121). For
non-WPS access points, check the following information.
●Network name (SSID/ESSID)
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the
“access point name” or “network name”.
●Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method /
encryption mode)
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check
which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK
(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system
authentication), or no security.
●Password (encryption key / network key)
The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also
called the “encryption key” or “network key”.
●Key index (transmit key)
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data
encryption. Use “1” as the setting.
●If system administrator status is needed to adjust network
settings, contact the system administrator for details.
●These settings are very important for network security. Exercise
adequate caution when changing these settings.
●For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on
checking settings, refer to the access point user manual.
●A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for
connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal
Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”.
●This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access points”.
●If you use MAC address ltering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure
to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can
check your camera’s MAC address in the menu
(=
32).
Choose
the [ 4] tab and select [Check MAC Address] in [Wi-Fi Settings].
121
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Connecting to Listed Access Points
1 View the listed access points.
●View the listed networks (access points)
as described in steps 1 – 3 of “Using
WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(=
120).
2 Choose an access point.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a network (access point),
and then press the [ ] button.
3 Enter the access point password.
●Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard and enter the password
(=
33).
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Next], and then press the
[ ] button.
4 Choose [Auto].
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Auto], and then press the
[ ] button.
6 Establish the connection.
●On the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for a few seconds.
●On the camera, press the [ ] button to
go to the next step.
7 Import images.
●Follow steps 6 – 9 in “Adding a
Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”
(=
118) to choose the smartphone,
adjust the privacy setting, and then import
the images.
●If you chose [PIN Method] in step 5, a PIN code will be displayed
on the screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point.
Choose a device in the [Select a Device] screen. For further
details, refer to the user manual included with your access point.
122
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Sending Images to a Registered
Web Service
Registering Web Services
Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that
you want to use.
●A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and other Web services.
●Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and
version information.
●For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.
com/cig/).
●You must have an account with Web services other than CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check
the websites for each Web service you want to register.
●Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.
5 Import images.
●Follow steps 6 – 9 in “Adding a
Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”
(=
118) to select the smartphone to
connect to and to congure the privacy
settings, and then import the images.
●To determine the access point password, check on the access
point itself or refer to the user manual.
●Up to 16 access points will be displayed. If no access points are
detected even after you choose [Refresh] in step 2 to update the
list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2 to complete access point
settings manually. Follow on-screen instructions and enter an
SSID, security settings, and a password.
●When you reconnect to a previous access point, “*” is displayed
for the password in step 3. To use the same password, choose
[Next] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial) and
press the [ ] button.
Previous Access Points
To reconnect to a previous access point automatically, follow step 4 in
“Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (=
118).
●To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose
[Camera Access Point Mode].
●To use a different access point, select [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then either follow step
4 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (=
120) or step 2 in
“Connecting to Listed Access Points” (=
121).
123
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
3 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
●Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
●Press the [ ] button.
●If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ] button. Use the
keyboard (=
33) to enter a nickname,
and then press the [ ] button to
return to the [Device Nickname] screen.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
4 Choose [ ].
●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
5 Choose [Authenticate].
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Authenticate], and then
press the [ ] button.
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
After linking the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, add CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera.
1 Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and access the camera link settings
page.
●From a computer or smartphone, access
http://www.canon.com/cig/ to visit
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
●Once the login screen is displayed,
enter your user name and password
to log in. If you do not have a CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY account, follow
the instructions to complete member
registration (free of charge).
●Access the camera settings page.
2 Choose the type of camera.
●On this camera model, [ ] is displayed
in the Wi-Fi menu.
●Once you choose [ ], a page is
displayed for entering the authentication
code. On this page in step 7, you will
enter the authentication code displayed
on the camera after steps 3 – 6.
124
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●CANON iMAGE GATEWAY and [ ]
(=
131) is now added as destinations,
and the [ ] icon changes to [ ].
●A message is displayed on the
smartphone or computer to indicate that
this process is nished. To add other
Web services, follow the procedure
in “Registering Other Web Services”
(=
124) from step 2.
●Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
●Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the menu. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen and
choose a device.
Registering Other Web Services
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the
camera. Note that CANON iMAGE GATEWAY must be registered on the
camera rst (=
123).
1 Access the Web service settings
screen.
●Follow step 1 in “Registering CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY” (=
123) to log in
to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, and then
access the Web service settings screen.
2 Congure the Web service you want
to use.
●Follow the instructions displayed on the
smartphone or computer to set up the
Web service.
6 Establish a connection with an
access point.
●Connect to the access point as described
in steps 4 – 6 in “Using WPS-Compatible
Access Points” (=
120) or in steps 2 – 4
in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(=
121).
●Once the camera is connected to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point,
an authentication code is displayed.
●Keep this display on and available for
viewing until step 7 is complete.
7 Enter the authentication code.
●On the smartphone or computer, enter
the authentication code displayed on the
camera and go to the next step.
●A six-digit conrmation number is
displayed.
8 Check the conrmation number and
complete the setup process.
●On the second screen in step 6, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button to display the conrmation number.
●Make sure the conrmation number on
the camera matches the number on the
smartphone or computer.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button.
●Complete the setup process on the
smartphone or computer.
125
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
3 Send an image.
●Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
●When uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, choose [I Agree], and
press the [ ] button.
●Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
●After the image is sent, [OK] is displayed.
Press the [ ] button to return to the
playback screen.
●Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
●You can also send multiple images at once, resize images, and
add comments before sending (=
130).
3 Choose [ ].
●In Playback mode, press the [ ] button
to access the Wi-Fi menu.
●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
●The Web service settings are now
updated.
●If any congured settings change, follow these steps again to
update the camera settings.
Uploading Images to Web Services
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
●Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
●Press the [ ] button.
2 Choose the destination.
●Choose the icon of the Web service to
connect to (either press the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button.
●If multiple recipients or sharing options
are used with a Web service, choose the
desired item on the [Select Recipient]
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button.
126
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●Once the media player is accessible,
this screen is displayed. The screen will
darken after a period of time.
●Perform operations on the media player
once connected. For details on controlling
the media player, refer to its instruction
manual.
4 Display the media player settings
screen on your TV set.
●Use your media player to bring up
[ EOS M3] on the TV screen.
●A different icon may be displayed
depending on the media player.
Locate the icon labeled [ EOS M3].
5 Display images.
●Choose [ EOS M3], the memory card
(SD or other card), the folder, and then
the image to view.
●Select an image to display it on the TV.
For details, refer to the media player’s
instruction manual.
● Press the [ ] button to close the
connection with the camera. If the screen
is darkened, press any button to bring
up the second screen shown in step 3
above, and then press the [ ] button.
Viewing Images Using a Media
Player
You can view images in your camera’s memory card on a TV or other
device.
This function requires a DLNA-compatible TV set, game system,
smartphone, or other media player. In this manual, the term “media player”
is used to refer to any such device.
Follow these instructions only after the media player is connected to an
access point. For information about settings and conguration, refer to the
documentation provided with the device.
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
●Follow step 2 of “Adding a Smartphone
Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (=
118) to
display the Wi-Fi menu.
2 Choose [ ].
●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3 Establish a connection with an
access point.
●Connect to the access point as described
in steps 4 – 6 of “Using WPS-Compatible
Access Points” (=
120) or in steps 2 – 4
of “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(=
121).
127
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Printing Images Wirelessly from a
Connected Printer
Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (=
119).
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
●Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in
step 2 of “Adding a Smartphone Using
the Wi-Fi Menu” (=
118).
2 Choose [ ].
●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3 Choose [Add a Device].
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
●The camera’s SSID is displayed.
●Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
●Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
●Media player connections will be displayed as “MediaServ.” in the
connection history.
●RAW images and movies are not displayed.
●Information overlay and details displayed on the TV set vary
depending on the media player. Depending on the media player,
image information may not be displayed, or vertical images may
be shown in horizontal orientation.
●Icons with labels such as “1-100” contain images grouped by le
number in the selected folder.
●Dates shown for cards or folders may reect the date on the
camera’s clock when the card or folder was last viewed.
128
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
●Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
●If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(=
32) > [ 4] tab > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Target History] > [Off].
●To use another access point, follow the steps in “Using Another
Access Point” (=
119).
4 Connect the printer to the network.
●In the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
5 Choose the printer.
●Choose the printer name (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
6 Choose an image to print.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ], and
press the [ ] button again.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print], and then press the
[ ] button.
●For detailed printing instructions, see
“Printing Images” (=
160).
●To end the connection, press the [ ]
button, choose [OK] on the conrmation
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
129
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
4 Send an image.
●Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
●Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
●[Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
●To end the connection, press the
[] button, choose [OK] on the
conrmation screen (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
●Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
●Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
●If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(=
32) > [ 4] tab > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Target History] > [Off].
●You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (=
130).
Sending Images to Another
Camera
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as
follows.
●Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be
connected to wirelessly. Even Canon-brand cameras that support Eye-
Fi cards cannot be connected to if they do not have a Wi-Fi function.
You cannot connect to PowerShot SD430 DIGITAL ELPH WIRELESS/
DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS cameras with this camera.
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
●Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in
step 2 of “Adding a Smartphone Using
the Wi-Fi Menu” (=
118).
2 Choose [ ].
●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3 Choose [Add a Device].
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
●Follow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera
too.
●Camera connection information will be
added when [Start connection on target
camera] is displayed on both camera
screens.
130
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●You can also choose images in step 2 by pressing the [ ] button
twice to access single-image display and then pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons or turning the [ ] dial.
Notes on Sending Images
●Keep your ngers or other objects off the Wi-Fi antenna area
(=
3). Covering this may decrease the speed of your image
transfers.
●Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take
a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera
battery level.
●Up to 50 images can be sent together at once. Only one movie can be
sent. However, Web services may limit the number of images or length
of movies you can send. For details, refer to the Web service you are
using.
●When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image
quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the
smartphone user manual.
●On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following
icons.
[] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak
●Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending
images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server.
Image Sending Options
You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image
resolution (size) before sending. Some Web services also enable you to
annotate the images you send.
Sending Multiple Images
1 Choose [Select and send].
●On the image transfer screen, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select and
send], and then press the [ ] button.
2 Choose images.
●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, and then press the [ ]
button to add a [ ] to the image.
●To cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
●Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
●After you nish choosing images, press
the [ ] button.
3 Send the images.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
131
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Sending Images Automatically
(Image Sync)
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can
be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.
Initial Preparations
Preparing the Camera
Register [ ] as the destination.
1 Add [ ] as a destination.
●Add [ ] as a destination, as described in
“Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY”
(=
123).
●When also choosing a Web service as a
destination for sending images, log in to
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY (=
124),
then choose your camera model,
access the Web service settings screen,
and under the Image Sync settings,
choose the Web service destination. For
details, refer to Help in CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY.
2 Choose the type of images to send
(only when sending movies with
images).
●Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ 4] tab (=
32).
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Image Sync], and then choose [Stills/
Movies] (=
32).
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels
(Image Size)
On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons, and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, choose
the recording pixel setting (image size) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
●To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.
●Choosing [ ] or [ ] will resize images that are larger than the
selected size before sending.
●Movies cannot be resized.
Adding Comments
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send
to e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of
characters and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the
Web service.
1 Access the screen for adding
comments.
●On the image transfer screen, choose
[ ] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
●On the image transfer screen, touch [ ].
2 Add a comment (=
33).
3 Send the image.
●When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent.
●You can also annotate multiple images before sending them. The
same comment is added to all images sent together.
132
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
1 Send images.
●Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Uploading Images
to Web Services” (=
125) to choose
[ ].
●Once the connection is established,
the images are sent. When the images
have been sent successfully to the
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server, [ ] is
displayed on the screen.
2 Save the images to the computer.
●Images are automatically saved to the
computer when you turn it on.
●[] is displayed in the sent images.
●When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery
pack or an AC adapter kit (sold separately, =
148).
●Even if images were imported to the computer through a different
method, any images not yet sent to the computer from CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY will be sent to the computer.
●Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same
network as the camera, because images are sent via the access
point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images
stored on a computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so
the computer must be connected to the Internet.
Preparing the Computer
Install and congure the software on the destination computer.
1 Install the software.
●Install the software on a computer
connected to the Internet (=
158).
2 Register the camera.
●Windows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ],
and then click [Add new camera].
●Mac OS: In the menu bar, click [ ], and
then click [Add new camera].
●A list of cameras linked to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose
the camera from which images are to be
sent.
●Once the camera is registered and the
computer is ready to receive images, the
icon changes to [ ].
Sending Images
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer
and save the images.
133
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●Movie shooting is not available.
●It may take longer than usual to focus on the subject.
●Depending on the connection status, image display or shot timing
may be slower than usual.
●Any jerky subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the
connection environment will not affect recorded images.
●Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the
smartphone to browse and import images from the camera.
Shooting Remotely
As you check a shooting screen on your smartphone, you can use it to
shoot remotely.
●Privacy settings must be congured in advance to allow all
images (=
116, =
135).
1 Secure the camera.
●Keep the camera still by mounting it on a
tripod or taking other measures.
2 Connect the camera and
smartphone (=
116).
●In the privacy settings, choose [All
images].
3 Choose remote shooting.
●Choose remote shooting in EOS Remote
on the smartphone.
●Once the camera is ready for remote
shooting, a live image from the camera
will be displayed on the smartphone.
●At this time, a message is displayed on
the camera, and all operations except
pressing the power button or mode dial
are disabled.
4 Shoot.
●Use the smartphone to shoot.
134
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
4 Choose the item to edit.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the item to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
●The items you can change depend on the
device or service.
Congurable Items
Connection
Web
Services
Change Device Nickname
(=
134)
O O O
– –
View Settings (=
135) –
O
– – –
Erase Connection Info (=
135)
O O O
– –
O
: Congurable – : Not congurable
Changing a Device Nickname
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
●Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (=
134), choose [Change
Device Nickname] and press the [ ]
button.
●Select the input eld and press the [ ]
button. Use the keyboard displayed to
enter a new nickname (=
33).
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.
Editing Connection Information
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose
a device to edit.
●Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
●Press the [ ] button.
●Access the device selection screen
(press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), choose the icon of a device to edit
(press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
2 Choose [Edit a Device].
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Edit a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
3 Choose the device to edit.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the device to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
135
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
2 Select a share setting.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a menu item.
●If selecting [All images] or [Images shot
today], press the [ ] button.
●If selecting [Images shot in past days],
press the [ ] button. In the screen that
appears, press the [ ][ ] buttons to
select the number of days, and then
press the [ ] button.
●If selecting [Select by rating], press the
[] button. In the screen that appears,
press the [ ][ ] buttons to select the
rating, and then press the [ ] button.
●If selecting [File number range], press the
[] button. In the screen that appears,
select the beginning and end of the le
number range, choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button. Follow steps 2 – 3
in “Selecting a Range” (=
103) to dene
the range.
●Choose [All images] when shooting remotely.
Erasing Connection Information
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have
connected to) as follows.
●Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (=
134), choose [Erase
Connection Info] and press the [ ]
button.
●After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
●The connection information will be
erased.
Specifying Images to Share with Smartphones
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
Share setting Images shared with smartphone
All images All images stored on the card
Images shot today Images shot on the current day
Images shot in past
days
Images shot within a specied previous
number of days
Select by rating Images with the specied rating (=
108)
File number range Images within the specied range
This setting is also possible whenever the screen in step 2 is displayed
during the smartphone connection.
1 Access the setting screen.
●Follow step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (=
134), choose [View
Settings] and then press the [ ] button.
136
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default
Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the
camera to another person, or dispose of it.
Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be
sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.
1 Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].
●Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ 4] tab (=
32).
2 Choose [Reset Settings].
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Reset Settings], and then
press the [ ] button.
3 Restore the default settings.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
●The Wi-Fi settings are now reset.
●To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose
[Clear all camera settings] on the [ 4] tab (=
145).
137
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
MENU (=
32) functions on the [ 1], [ 2], [ 3] and [ 4] tabs can be
congured. Customize commonly used functions as desired, for greater
convenience.
Date-Based Image Storage
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.
●Choose [Create Folder] on the [ 1] tab
and then choose [Daily].
●Images will now be saved in folders
created on the shooting date.
File Numbering
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001–9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2000 images each. You can change
how the camera assigns le numbers.
●Choose [File Numbering] on the [ 1] tab
and then choose an option.
Continuous
Images are numbered consecutively (until the
9999th shot is taken/saved) even if you switch
memory cards.
Auto Reset Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch
memory cards, or when a new folder is created.
8
Set-Up Menu
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for greater convenience
138
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be
less than the advertised capacity.
Low-Level Formatting
Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing
is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly
stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-
level formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take
other steps to back them up.
●On the screen in step 2 of “Formatting
Memory Cards” (=
138), press the
[ ] button to place a [ ] by [Low
Level Format].
●Follow step 2 in “Formatting Memory
Cards” (=
138) to continue the
formatting process.
●Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory
Cards” (=
138), because data is erased from all storage regions
of the memory card.
●You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing
[Cancel]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card
can be used normally.
●Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be
numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images
on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001,
use an empty (or formatted (=
138)) memory card.
Formatting Memory Cards
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device,
you should format the card with this camera.
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy
images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back
them up.
1 Access the [Format] screen.
●Choose [Format] on the [ 1] tab and then
press the [ ] button.
2 Choose [OK].
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
●The card is now formatted.
●Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes le
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards,
take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by
physically destroying cards.
139
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Resetting the Electronic Level
Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is
not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level.
●Choose [Electronic Level] on the [ 1] tab
and then press the [ ] button.
●Choose [Reset], and press the [ ]
button.
●Choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
Using Eco Mode
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.
When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce
battery consumption.
1 Congure the settings.
●Choose [Eco Mode] on the [ 2] tab and
then choose [On].
●[] is now shown on the shooting
screen (=
174).
●The screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds; approximately ten seconds
after darkening, the screen turns off.
The camera turns off after approximately
three minutes of inactivity.
2 Shoot.
●To activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off but the
(rear) indicator lamp is still on, press the
shutter button halfway.
Changing Video Formats
This lets you dene the image format for your TV set. This setting also
changes the image quality (frame rate) options available for movies.
●Choose [Video system] on the [ 1] tab
and then choose an option.
Electronic Level Calibration
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the
camera.
For greater calibration accuracy, display grid lines (=
30) to help you
level the camera in advance.
1 Make sure the camera is level.
●Place the camera on a at surface, such
as a table.
2 Calibrate the electronic level.
●Choose [Electronic Level] on the [ 1] tab
and then press the [ ] button.
●To adjust left/right tilt, choose [Horizontal
Roll Calibration], and to adjust forward/
backward tilt, choose [Vertical Pitch
Calibration], followed by the [ ] button. A
conrmation message is displayed.
●Choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
140
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Screen Brightness
Adjust screen brightness as follows.
●Choose [LCD Brightness] on the [ 2] tab
and press the [ ] button. Choose the
speed by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or
turning the [ ] dial.
●For maximum brightness, press and hold the [ ] button
for at least one second when the shooting screen is displayed
or when in single-image display. (This will override the [LCD
Brightness] setting on the [ 2] tab.) To restore the original
brightness, press and hold the [ ] button again for at least
one second or restart the camera.
Power-Saving Adjustment
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto
Power Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (=
28).
●Choose [Power Saving] on the [ 2] tab
and then press the [ ] button.
●Select an item and press the [ ] button.
Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to change the setting and then press
[ ] again.
●To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for
[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].
●The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power
Down] to [Off].
●These power-saving functions are not available when you have
set Eco Mode (=
139) to [On].
141
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
●Choose [Date/Time] on the [ 2] tab and
then press the [ ] button.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then adjust the setting, either
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial.
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
●Choose [Language ] on the [ 2] tab
and then press the [ ] button.
●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
●You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by
pressing and holding the [ ] button and pressing the [ ]
button.
World Clock
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when
you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to
that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the
Date/Time setting manually.
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your
home time zone, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (=
18).
1 Specify your destination.
●Choose [Time Zone] on the [ 2] tab and
then press the [ ] button.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
destination.
●To set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), choose [ ] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons, and then choose [ ] by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
●Press the [ ] button.
2 Switch to the destination time zone.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
●[] is now shown on the shooting screen
(=
174).
●Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (=
19) will
automatically update your [ Home] time and date.
142
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●Note the following precautions when operating the touch screen.
- Since the LCD monitor is not pressure-sensitive, do not use
any sharp objects such as your ngernail or a ballpoint pen, for
touch operations.
- Do not use wet ngers for touch screen operations.
- If the LCD monitor has any moisture or if your ngers are wet,
the touch screen may not respond or incorrect operation may
occur. In such a case, turn off the power and wipe the LCD
monitor with a cloth.
- Do not attach any protective sheet (commercially available) or
sticker on the LCD monitor. Doing so may reduce touch screen
responsiveness.
●The touch screen may not be as responsive in [Sensitive] mode
when performing successive touch operations.
Cleaning the Image Sensor
The camera has a cleaning function that automatically removes dust from
the image sensor when the power is turned on or off, or when the camera
shuts off in Power Saving mode. This cleaning function can be activated
whenever you like, or shut off entirely.
Turning Auto Cleaning Off
1 Access the setting screen.
● After turning the camera on in shooting
mode, choose [Sensor cleaning] on the
[ 3] tab and press the [ ] button.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Auto cleaning ], and
then press the [ ] button.
Silencing Camera Operations
The camera can be silenced when you press the shutter button halfway or
trigger the self-timer.
●Choose [Beep] on the [ 3] tab and then
choose [Off].
Hiding Hints and Tips
Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose an option in the quick
setting menu (=
31) or shooting functions screen (=
61). If you
prefer, you can deactivate this information.
●Choose [Hints & Tips] on the [ 3] tab and
then choose [Off].
Changing Touch Screen Settings
The sensitivity of the touch screen can be changed to respond to a lighter
touch, or not respond to touch at all.
●Choose [Touch Operation] on the [ 3] tab
and then choose the desired setting.
●Choose [Sensitive] to boost touch screen
sensitivity, or choose [Disable] to turn
touch screen control off.
143
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●For the most effective cleaning results, place the camera upright
on a desk or other surface before cleaning.
●Repeated consecutive sensor cleanings will not produce notably
better results. [Clean now ] may not be available for selection
immediately after cleaning.
●If there is dust or any other material on the image sensor that
the cleaning function cannot remove, contact a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
Cleaning Manually
If there is dust or dirt on the image sensor that the cleaner cannot remove,
try to clean it manually using a commercial blower or other device.
The image sensor is an extremely delicate component. If manual cleaning
is required, consulting with the Canon Service Center (listed in the
appendix) is strongly recommended.
1 Turn the camera off.
2 Detach the lens.
3 Clean the image sensor.
●The image sensor is an extremely delicate component. Exercise
care when cleaning.
●Do not use a blower equipped with a brush. Brushes can damage
the image sensor upon contact.
●Do not insert the blower into the lens mount surface. This can
damage the shutter.
●Do not clean with high-pressure air or gas. High-pressure airow
can damage the image sensor, and condensing or freezing gas
can damage the image sensor surface.
●If the blower still fails to clean the image sensor, having the
sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
2 Congure the settings.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Disable], and then press
the [ ] button.
Activating the Cleaner
1 Access the setting screen.
●After turning the camera on in shooting
mode, choose [Sensor cleaning] on the
[ 3] tab and press the [ ] button.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Clean now ], and then
press the [ ] button.
2 Clean the sensor.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
●The screen will indicate that the sensor
is being cleaned. Although there will be a
shutter sound, a picture is not taken.
●The sensor cleaning also works while no lens is attached. If no
lens is attached, do not insert your nger or blower tip beyond the
lens mount. This is to prevent damage to the shutter curtains.
144
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info]
on the screen above, and then press the [ ] button.
●You can also use the EOS Utility software (=
158) to enter,
change, and delete copyright information. Some characters
entered with the software may not display on the camera, but will
be correctly recorded in images.
●You can check copyright information recorded in images using the
software once you save the images to a computer.
Deleting All Copyright Information
You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same
time as follows.
●Follow the steps in “Setting Copyright
Information to Record in Images”
(=
144) and choose [Delete Copyright
Info].
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
●The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted.
Checking Certication Logos
Some logos for certication requirements met by the camera can be
viewed on the screen. Other certication logos are printed in this guide, on
the camera packaging, or on the camera body.
●Choose [Certication Logo Display]
on the [ 4] tab and then press the [ ]
button.
Setting Copyright Information to Record in
Images
To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this
information beforehand as follows.
●Choose [Copyright Info] on the [ 4] tab
and then press the [ ] button.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Enter Author’s Name] or
[Enter Copyright Details]. Press the [ ]
button to access the keyboard, and enter
the name (=
33).
●Press the [ ] button, and [Accept
changes?] is displayed. Press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Yes], and then press the [ ] button.
●The information set here will now be
recorded in images.
145
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●The following functions are not restored to default settings.
- [Video system] on the [ 1] tab (=
139)
- [Time Zone] (=
141), [Date/Time] (=
141), and [Language
] (=
141) on the [ 2] tab
- [External ash func. setting] or [External ash C.Fn setting] in
[Flash Control] on the [ 3] tab
- The [ 1] tab
- Exposure compensation (=
61) settings
- Shooting mode (=
51)
- Wi-Fi settings (=
115)
- Calibrated value for the electronic level (=
139)
- Copyright information (=
144)
Adjusting Other Settings
The following functions are also available for use.
●[Wi-Fi Settings] ([ 4] tab) (=
115)
●[Custom shooting mode (C)] ([ 4] tab) (=
90)
●[ rmware ver.: *.*.*] ([ 4] tab) (used for updating the rmware)
●During rmware updates, the touch screen will be disabled to
prevent accidental operations.
Restoring Defaults
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera
settings.
1 Access the [Clear all camera
settings] screen.
●Choose [Clear all camera settings] on the
[ 4] tab and then press the [ ] button.
2 Restore default settings.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
●Default settings are now restored.
146
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used
with genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents
such as re, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please
note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the
malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request
such repairs on a chargeable basis.
9
Accessories
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon accessories and
other compatible accessories sold separately
147
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
System Map
*1 Depending on the lens attached, use of the Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3
(sold separately) may be necessary.
*2 Also available for purchase separately.
90EX
USB port
Card slot
Remote
Controller
RC-6
Electronic Viewnder
EVF-DC1
ST-E3-RT
430EX II
600EX-RT
600EX
320EX
270EX II
Macro Twin Lite
MT-24EX
Macro Ring Lite
MR-14EX II
MR-14EX
ST-E2
*
1
IFC-400PCU*2
TV set/Video
Computer
PictBridge-compatible printer
Card reader
SD/SDHC/SDXC
memory card
External microphone
EF lenses
EF-S lenses
EF-M lenses
Mount Adapter
EF-EOS M
AC Adapter Kit
ACK-E17
Accessories
Battery Charger
LC-E17/LC-E17E*
2
Battery Pack
LP-E17*
2
Body Jacket
EH27-CJ
Neck Strap
EM-E2
Neck Strap
EM-200DB*
2
HDMI Cable
HTC-100
148
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●The message [Battery communication error] is displayed if you
use a non-genuine Canon battery pack, and user response is
required. Note that Canon shall not be liable for any damages
resulting from accidents, such as malfunction or re, that occur
due to use of non-genuine Canon battery packs.
●The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can
attach so that is visible on a charged battery pack, and attach
it so that is not visible on an uncharged battery pack.
AC Adapter Kit ACK-E17
●For powering the camera using
household power. Recommended when
using the camera over extended periods,
or when connecting the camera to a
printer or computer. Cannot be used to
charge the battery pack in the camera.
●The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with
100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).
●For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially
available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer
designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
Optional Accessories
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that
availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be
available.
Lens
EF-M lenses, EF lenses, EF-S lenses
●Pick from a variety of lenses to support whatever target or expression
you want. The Mount Adapter EF-EOS M is required to attach EF and
EF-S lenses.
Mount Adapter EF-EOS M
●Use this mounting adapter to attach EF or
EF-S lenses to your camera.
Power Supplies
Battery Pack LP-E17
●Rechargeable lithium-ion battery.
Battery Charger LC-E17/LC-E17E
●Charger for Battery Pack LP-E17
149
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3
●Connection cord for using Speedlite away
from camera.
Other Accessories
Electronic Viewnder EVF-DC1
●Makes it easier to get the shot you’re
looking for.
Remote Controller RC-6
●Enables you to re a xed camera from
a distance.
Body Jacket EH27-CJ
●Protects the camera from dust and
scratches.
Neck Strap EM-E2
●Strap made from the same material as
Body Jacket EH27-CJ.
Flash
Speedlite 600EX-RT/600EX/430EX II/
320EX/270EX II/90EX
●Shoe-mounted ash unit that enables
many styles of ash photography.
Speedlite 580EX II, 580EX, 550EX,
430EX, 420EX, 380EX, 270EX, and
220EX are also supported.
Speedlite Transmitter ST-E3-RT/ST-E2
●Enables wireless control of slave
Speedlite ash units (except Speedlite
220EX/270EX).
●Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3 may be
required when using ST-E2 with certain
lenses.
Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX
Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX II/MR-14EX
●External macro ash unit that enables
many styles of macro ash photography.
150
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Using Optional Accessories
Still Images Movies
Playback on a TV
Still Images Movies
Connecting the camera to an HDTV with the HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold
separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the
TV. Movies shot at an image quality of [ ], [ ], [ ],
[ ], or [ ] can be viewed in high denition.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
1 Make sure the camera and TV are
off.
2 Connect the camera to the TV.
●On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into
the HDMI input as shown.
●On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
Interface Cable IFC-400PCU
●For connecting the camera to a computer
or printer.
●IFC-200U and IFC-500U are also
compatible.
HDMI Cable HTC-100
●For connecting the camera to an HDMI
input of a high-denition TV.
Printers
Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible
Printers
●Even without using a computer, you can
print images by connecting the camera
directly to a printer.
For details, visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
151
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Powering the Camera with Household Power
Still Images Movies
Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-E17 (sold separately)
eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level.
1 Make sure the camera is off.
2 Insert the coupler.
●Follow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Memory Card” (=
17) to
open the cover.
●Holding the coupler with the terminals (1)
facing as shown, insert the coupler just
as you would a battery pack (following
step 2 in “Inserting the Battery Pack and
Memory Card” (=
17)).
●Follow step 4 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Memory Card” (=
18) to
close the cover.
3 Connect the adapter to the coupler.
●Open the cover and insert the adapter
plug fully into the coupler.
4 Connect the power cord.
●Insert one end of the power cord into the
compact power adapter, and then plug
the other end into a power outlet.
●Turn the camera on and use it as desired.
●When nished, turn the camera off and
unplug the power cord from the outlet.
3 Turn the TV on and switch to
external input.
●Switch the TV input to the external input
you connected the cable to in step 2.
4 Turn the camera on.
●Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
●Images from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
●When nished, turn off the camera and
TV before disconnecting the cable.
●Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is
connected to a television.
●When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot
while previewing shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot,
follow the same steps as when using the camera screen.
However, magnifying images (=
100) is not available.
152
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Using the Hot Shoe
The hot shoe is used to attach electronic viewnders and external ashes
(sold separately).
1 Remove the hot shoe cap.
●Pull the cap out in the direction of the
arrow.
●To avoid losing the cap, place it in the
case for your electronic viewnder or
external ash.
2 Attach the hot shoe cap.
●After removing the external ash or
viewnder, reattach the cap to protect the
hot shoe.
●Insert the cap in the direction of the
arrow.
●Do not raise the internal ash when an accessory besides the
Electronic Viewnder EVF-DC1 is attached to the hot shoe. The
ash may strike the accessory. The ash will not re at this time.
●Do not open the LCD monitor upward when an accessory like an
electronic viewnder or external ash is attached to the hot shoe.
The monitor may strike the viewnder or ash.
●Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while
the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the
camera.
●Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing
so could result in malfunction or damage to the product.
Remote Control Shooting
Use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately) to shoot pictures up to
approx. 5 meters (16 ft.) from the front of the camera.
●Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(=
40) and choose [ ].
●Point the Remote Controller toward the
camera’s remote control sensor and
press the transmit button to shoot.
●The picture is not taken until focus is achieved.
●Fluorescent or LED lighting may cause incorrect operation of the
camera by triggering the shutter inadvertently. Try to keep the
camera away from such light sources.
●If you point a remote controller for a TV set toward the camera
and operate it, it may cause incorrect operation of the camera by
triggering the shutter inadvertently.
●The Remote Controller can also be used for shooting movies
(=
58).
153
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
4 Turn on the camera and switch to
the camera or electronic viewnder
display.
●Bring your eye up to the electronic
viewnder, and the camera’s screen will
shut off.
●Remove your eye, and the camera will
shut off the nder display and turn the
camera screen back on.
5 Adjust the view.
●Turn the dial until you can see the display
of the electronic viewnder clearly.
6 Remove from the camera.
●Once you are done, turn off the camera
and hold down the [UNLOCK] button of
the electronic viewnder as you remove
it.
●Remove the electronic viewnder from
the camera and store in a safe place
when not in use.
●The electronic viewnder and camera screen displays cannot be
active at the same time.
●Camera touch screen control is not available in electronic
viewnder display mode.
Using Electronic Viewnders (Sold Separately)
Still Images Movies
Use an electronic viewnder (sold separately) to keep closer track of your
subject and make it easier to shoot.
When using an electronic viewnder, shooting time and number of
pictures are reduced compared to using the camera’s rear screen (LCD
monitor).
1 Make sure the camera is off.
2 Attach the electronic viewnder to
the hot shoe.
●Remove the cover of the electronic
viewnder.
●Insert the electronic viewnder into the
hot shoe (=
152) in the direction shown
until it clicks into place.
3 Adjust the angle of the electronic
viewnder.
●Adjust the angle of the electronic
viewnder by up to approximately 90
degrees, as needed for your scene or
target.
154
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Using an External Flash (Sold Separately)
Still Images Movies
More sophisticated ash photography is possible with an optional
Speedlite EX series ash. For movie shooting using an LED light, the
optional Speedlite 320EX ash is available.
●Non-EX series Canon ash units may not re correctly or may not
re at all, in some cases.
●Use of non-Canon ash units (especially high-voltage ash units)
or ash accessories may prevent normal camera operation and
may damage the camera.
●Also refer to the Speedlite EX series manual for additional
information. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all the
features of EXseries Speedlites.
1 Attach the ash.
●Make sure the camera is off before
attaching the ash.
2 Turn the ash on, and then turn the
camera on.
●An orange [ ] icon is now displayed.
●The ash pilot lamp will light up when the
ash is ready.
●Although the electronic viewnder is produced under extremely
high-precision manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of
the pixels meet design specications, in rare cases some pixels
may be defective or may appear as red or black dots. This is not a
malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded.
●Vertical or horizontal black bars may be displayed depending on
the selected aspect ratio (=
45). The black bars indicate image
areas not recorded.
●Press the [ ] button on the electronic viewnder to change the
screen displayed.
●In the menu (=
32), set the [Display Control] option on the
[1] tab to [Manual] to keep the camera screen from turning on
even when you remove your eye from the viewnder. Press the
[] button on the electronic viewnder to bring up the camera
display in this mode.
●Using the electronic viewnder in [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and
[] modes will result in a smoother display in both the viewnder
and camera screen. In the menu (=
32), set the [Display
Mode] option on the [ 1] tab to [Power Saving] to return to the
normal display and conserve battery power.
●If the Wi-Fi (=
115) or keyboard screen (=
33) displays are
brought up in electronic viewnder mode, the display will switch
back to the camera screen.
●Different brightness settings (=
140) can be dened for the
electronic viewnder and camera screens.
155
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Setting External Flash Functions
When an external ash is attached, go to [Flash Control] on the [ 3] tab
of the menu (=
32) to adjust the following settings:
●Flash Firing (=
75)
●E-TTL II Metering (=
77)
●Red-eye Reduction (=
47)
●External Flash Function Settings (=
155)
●External Flash Custom Function Settings (=
156)
●Reset (=
157)
●Choose [External ash func. setting], and
press the [ ] button to display the screen
on the left.
●Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an option and press the [ ] button or turn
the [ ] dial. On the next screen, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose a setting, and then press the [ ]
button to adjust it.
Option Description
Flash Mode
You can select the ash mode to suit your
desired ash shooting.
●[E-TTL II ash metering] is the standard
mode of EX-series Speedlites for automatic
ash shooting.
●The [Manual ash] mode is for setting the
Speedlite’s [Flash output level] yourself.
●For information on other ash modes, refer to
a compatible Speedlite’s instruction manual.
Wireless Func.
Wireless (multiple) ash shooting is available.
When shooting with multiple ashes, you can
also set up the radio channel, optical channel,
and master ash ring. For details on wireless
ash, refer to the instruction manual of the
Speedlite compatible with wireless ash.
3 Choose shooting mode [ ], [ ],
[ ], or [ ].
●Flash settings can only be congured in
these modes. In other modes, the ash
is adjusted and red automatically as
needed.
4 Congure the external ash.
(=
155)
●Keep cords (from the macro ring lite or macro twin lite, as well as
the off-camera shoe cord) away from ash heads.
●When using a tripod, adjust the position of the legs to prevent the
ash heads from coming into contact with the legs.
●Depending on the position where you have attached the ash
controller, it may come into contact with the LCD monitor. To
prevent this, adjust the position of attachment or the orientation of
the controller, or adjust the angle of the monitor.
●Settings for the built-in ash cannot be congured while a
Speedlite EX series ash is attached, because that setting screen
is no longer accessible.
●You can also access the setting screen by pressing the [ ] button
for at least one second.
●320EX only: Auto LED lighting is only available in low-light movie
recording or in Movie mode. In this case, the [ ] icon is shown.
●The AF-assist beam on the external ash will not re. If using
Speedlite 320EX (sold separately), the LED light may turn on to
serve as an AF-assist beam.
156
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Option Description
Ratio control Dene the ash output level when using wireless
(multi-ash) shooting or the MR-14EX II.
●The [Built-in ash settings] screen cannot be accessed when an
external ash is attached.
●On the screen, the settable functions and the display will differ
depending on the Speedlite, current ash mode, ash Custom
Function settings, etc. For details on your Speedlite’s ash
functions, refer to the instruction manual of the Speedlite (sold
separately).
●With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with ash function
settings, only [Flash Exp. Comp] can be adjusted. ([Shutter
synchronization] can also be set with certain EX-series
Speedlites.)
Setting External Flash Custom Functions
For details on the Speedlite’s Custom Functions, refer to the instruction
manual of the Speedlite (sold separately).
●Press the [ ] button, select
[External ash C.Fn setting] (within [Flash
Control] on the [ 3] tab), and then press
the [ ] button.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to select an option, and then press
the [ ] button. On the next screen, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose a setting, and then press the [ ]
button to adjust it.
●Set [Flash metering mode] to [1:TTL] (automatic ash metering)
in [External ash C.Fn setting] to fully re the ash when shooting.
Option Description
Flash zoom
(Flash coverage)
With Speedlites that have a zooming ash head,
you can set the ash coverage. Normally, set this
to [AUTO] so that the camera will automatically
set the ash coverage to match the lens focal
length.
Shutter
synchronization
Change the timing of the ash and shutter
release as follows.
●[] will re the ash immediately after the
shutter opens.
●[] will re the ash immediately before
the second curtain closes. If the shutter
speed is 1/100 second or faster, rst-curtain
synchronization will be used automatically
even if [Second-curtain synchronization] is
set.
●[] allows you to use the ash at all shutter
speeds. This is especially effective for
portraits using ll ash when you want to give
priority to the aperture setting.
Flash Exp. Comp
This allows you to adjust exposure
compensation when the ash res. For details,
refer to the instruction manual for the ash. If
ash exposure compensation is dened on the
Speedlite, you cannot set it on the camera side.
If it is dened on both the camera and ash, the
ash’s setting overrides the camera’s.
Flash output
level
Dene the power output of the ash. For details,
refer to the instruction manual for the ash. If it is
dened on both the camera and ash, the ash
setting overrides the camera setting.
Flash exposure
bracketing
Activates FEB (Flash Exposure Bracketing),
taking three shots while automatically changing
the ash output. For details, refer to the
instruction manual of your FEB-compatible ash.
Flash count,
Flash frequency
Denes the ash count and frequency when
[Flash Mode] is set to [MULTI].
157
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●Settings will apply to external microphones as well when the
attenuator is enabled (=
59).
●When using an external microphone, [Wind Filter] (=
59) is
always set to [Off].
Resetting External Flash Functions
You can reset the options in the [External ash func. setting] and [External
ash C.Fn setting] screens to their defaults.
●Press the [ ] button, select [Clear
settings] (within [Flash Control] on the
[ 3] tab), and press the [ ] button.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons, or turn the [ ]
dial to select an option, and then press
the [ ] button. On the next screen, press
the [ ][ ] buttons, or turn the [ ] dial
to choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
●[Clear built-in ash set.] cannot be accessed when an external
ash is attached.
Using External Microphones
Still Images Movies
Connect a commercially available microphone equipped with a mini
plug (3.5 mm diameter) to the camera’s external microphone IN terminal
(=
3). Sound will be recorded with the external microphone. The
internal microphones will not be used when an external microphone is
connected.
●Open the cover and connect the external
microphone.
158
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Checking Your Computer Environment
The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed
system requirements and compatibility information, including support in
new operating systems, visit the Canon website.
Operating
System
Windows Mac OS
Windows 8/8.1
Windows 7 SP1
Mac OS X 10.9
Mac OS X 10.8
●Check the Canon website for the latest system requirements,
including supported OS versions.
Installing the Software
1 Download the software.
●Using a computer connected to the
Internet, go to “http://www.canon.com/
icpd/”.
●Access the site for your country or region.
●Download the software.
2 Click on [Easy Installation] and
follow the on-screen instructions.
●Double-click on the downloaded le, and
then click on [Easy Installation].
●Follow the on-screen instructions to
complete the installation process.
●Installation may take some time,
depending on computer performance and
the Internet connection.
●Click [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen
after installation.
Using the Software
The software available for download from the Canon website is introduced
below, with instructions for installation and saving images to a computer.
Software
After downloading the software from the Canon website and installing it,
you can do the following things on your computer.
●EOS Utility
- Import images and change camera settings
●Digital Photo Professional
- Browse, process and edit RAW images
●Picture Style Editor
- Edit Picture Styles and create and save original Picture Style les
●Image Transfer Utility
- Set up Image Sync (=
131) and receive images
●To view or edit movies on your computer, use software that
supports the movies shot with your camera (i.e. software installed
as standard on your computer or software that is generally
available).
Software Instruction Manual
Download software instruction manuals from the Canon website.
●Using a computer connected to the
Internet, go to “http://www.canon.com/
icpd/”.
●Access the site for your country or region.
159
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
3 Import images.
●Click on [Download images to computer],
then [Start automatic download].
●Images will be loaded into the computer
and saved to the Pictures folder, in
separate folders named by date. Digital
Photo Professional will then start up
automatically and display the loaded
images.
●After the image-loading process is
complete, close EOS Utility, press the
[] button to turn the camera off, and
unplug the cable.
●To view images loaded into your
computer, use Digital Photo Professional;
to view movies imported onto your
computer, use software that supports
the movies shot with your camera (i.e.
software installed as standard on your
computer or software that is generally
available).
Saving Images to a Computer
Use an interface cable (=
2) to connect your camera and save
images to a personal computer.
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration.
1 Connect the camera to the
computer.
●With the camera turned off, open the
cover (1). With the smaller plug of the
cable in the orientation shown, insert the
plug fully into the camera terminal (2).
●Insert the larger plug of the cable into the
computer’s USB port. For details about
USB connections on the computer, refer
to the computer user manual.
2 Turn on the camera and bring up
EOS Utility.
●Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
●On Windows, double-click on the EOS
Utility icon on the desktop.
●On Mac OS, click on the EOS Utility icon
in the Dock (the bar at the bottom of the
desktop screen).
●On subsequent connections, EOS Utility
will start up automatically when you
connect the camera to the computer and
turn on the camera.
160
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Printing Images
Still Images Movies
Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer.
On the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare
orders for photo development services, and prepare orders or print
images for photobooks.
A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the
sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by
printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information.
Easy Print
Still Images Movies
Easily print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-
compatible printer (sold separately) with an interface cable (=
2).
1 Make sure the camera and printer
are off.
2 Connect the camera to the printer.
●Open the terminal cover. Holding the
smaller cable plug in the orientation
shown, insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal.
●Connect the larger cable plug to the
printer. For other connection details, refer
to the printer manual.
●The rst time you connect the camera to the computer, drivers will
be installed, so it may take a few minutes until camera images are
accessible.
●Although you can save images to a computer simply by
connecting your camera to the computer without using the
software, the following limitations apply.
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the
computer until camera images are accessible.
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal
orientation.
- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images)
may not be saved.
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved
to a computer.
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image
information, depending on the operating system version, the
software in use, or image le sizes.
161
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images Movies
1 Access the printing screen.
●Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(=
160) to access this screen.
2 Congure the settings.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to select an option. Press the [ ]
button, and on the next screen, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
adjust the option. Press the [ ] button to
return to the print screen.
Default Matches current printer settings.
Date Prints images with the date added.
File No. Prints images with the le number added.
Both Prints images with both the date and le
number added.
Off –
Default Matches current printer settings.
Off –
On Uses information from the time of shooting
to print under optimal settings.
Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye.
Copies Choose the number of copies to print.
Cropping –Specify a desired image area to print
(=
162).
Paper
Settings –Specify the paper size, layout, and other
details (=
162).
3 Turn the printer on.
4 Turn the camera on.
●Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
5 Choose an image.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
6 Access the printing screen.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [ ], and
press the [ ] button again.
7 Print the image.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print], and then press the
[ ] button.
●Printing now begins.
●To print other images, repeat the above
procedures starting from step 5 after
printing is nished.
●When you are nished printing, turn the
camera and printer off and disconnect
the cable.
●For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately),
see “Printers” (=
150).
162
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
Still Images Movies
1 Choose [Paper Settings].
●After following step 1 in “Conguring Print
Settings” (=
161) to access the printing
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and
press the [ ] button.
2 Choose a paper size.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
3 Choose a type of paper.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
4 Choose a layout.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
●When choosing [N-up], press the [ ]
button. On the next screen, press the
[ ][ ] buttons, or turn the [ ] dial to
choose the number of images to print,
and then press the [ ] button.
5 Print the image.
Cropping Images before Printing
Still Images Movies
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.
1 Choose [Cropping].
●After following step 1 in “Conguring Print
Settings” (=
161) to access the printing
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the
[ ] button.
●A cropping frame is now displayed,
indicating the image area to print.
2 Adjust the cropping frame as
needed.
●To resize the frame, press the [ ] or [ ]
button or turn the [ ] dial.
●To move the frame, press the
[][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
●To rotate the frame, press the [ ]
button.
●When nished, press the [ ] button.
3 Print the image.
●Follow step 7 in “Easy Print” (=
160)
to print.
●Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
163
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
4 Print the image.
Printing Movie Scenes
Still Images Movies
1 Access the printing screen.
●Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(=
160) to choose a movie. This screen
is displayed.
2 Choose a printing method.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ].
Press the [ ] button, and on the next
screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose the printing
method, and then press the [ ] button to
return to the print screen.
3 Print the image.
Movie Printing Options
Single Prints the current scene as a still image.
Sequence
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on
a single sheet of paper. You can also print the folder
number, le number, and elapsed time for the frame by
setting [Caption] to [On].
Available Layout Options
Default Matches current printer settings.
Bordered Prints with blank space around the image.
Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
N-up Choose how many images to print per sheet.
ID Photo
Prints images for identication purposes.
Only available for images with a recording pixel setting of
L and an aspect ratio of 3:2.
Fixed Size Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.
Printing ID Photos
Still Images Movies
1 Choose [ID Photo].
●Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing
Paper Size and Layout before Printing”
(=
162), choose [ID Photo] and press
the [ ] button.
2 Choose the long and short side
length.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option. Press the [ ]
button, and on the next screen, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to choose the length, and then press the
[ ].
3 Choose the printing area.
●In step 2, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [Cropping].
●Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before
Printing” (=
162) to choose the printing
area.
164
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Print Type
Standard One image is printed per sheet.
Index Smaller versions of multiple images are
printed per sheet.
Both Both standard and index formats are
printed.
Date On Images are printed with the shooting date.
Off –
File No. On Images are printed with the le number.
Off –
Clear
DPOF data
On All image print list settings are cleared
after printing.
Off –
●Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
●[] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
●Setting [Date] to [On] may cause some printers to print the date
twice.
●Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both
[Date] and [File No.] at the same time.
●Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-
compatible printers (sold separately).
●The date is printed in a format matching the setting details in
[Date/Time] on the [ 2] tab (=
18) of the menu (=
32).
●To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button again.
●[ID Photo] and [Sequence] cannot be chosen on Canon-brand
PictBridge-compatible printers from CP720/CP730 and earlier
models.
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images Movies
Batch printing (=
166) and ordering prints from a photo development
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a
memory card and congure relevant settings, such as the number of
copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will
conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.
●RAW images cannot be included in print list.
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images Movies
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or le number, and
other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print
list.
●Press the [ ] button, choose [Print
settings] on the [ 2] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Print Settings]. Press
the [ ] button, and on the next screen,
adjust the desired settings (=
32).
165
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
Still Images Movies
●Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (=
165), choose
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
●Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(=
103) to specify images.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the [ ] button.
Setting Up Printing for All Images
Still Images Movies
●Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (=
165), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Clearing All Images from the Print List
●Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (=
165), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
Still Images Movies
1 Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
●Press the [ ] button, choose [Print
settings] on the [ 2] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Select Images & Qty.],
and then press the [ ] button (=
32).
2 Choose an image.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
●You can now specify the number of
copies.
●If you specify index printing for the
image, it is labeled with a [ ] icon. To
cancel index printing for the image, press
the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer
displayed.
3 Specify the number of prints.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the number of prints (up
to 99).
●To set up printing for other images and
specify the number of prints, repeat steps
2 – 3.
●Printing quantity cannot be specied for
index prints. You can only choose which
images to print, by following step 2.
●When nished, press the [ ] button
to return to the menu screen.
166
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Adding Images Individually
Still Images Movies
1 Choose [Select].
●Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (=
166), choose
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
2 Choose an image.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
●[] is displayed.
●To remove the image from the photobook,
press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
●Repeat this process to specify other
images.
●When nished, press the [ ] button
to return to the menu screen.
Adding All Images to a Photobook
Still Images Movies
●Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (=
166), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Adding Images to a Photobook
Still Images Movies
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer,
where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when
ordering printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own
printer.
Choosing a Selection Method
●Press the [ ] button, choose
[Photobook Set-up] on the [ 2] tab, and
then choose how you will select images.
●[ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
167
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Removing All Images from a Photobook
Still Images Movies
●Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (=
166), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
●Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
168
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Troubleshooting
If you think there is a problem with the camera, rst check the following.
If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
Power
Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.
●Conrm that the battery pack is charged (=
16).
●Conrm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (=
17).
●Conrm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (=
17).
●Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.
●Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery
pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals
do not touch any metal objects.
●Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
●If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon
after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.
The battery pack is swollen.
●Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if
battery swelling prevents the battery pack from tting in the camera, contact a
Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
A sound is heard when turning the camera on or off with an EF-M lens
attached.
●When you turn off the camera, the lens aperture makes a small sound as it stops
down to prevent light from entering the camera. This is to protect the camera’s
internal components.
10
Appendix
Helpful information when using the camera
169
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Shots are blurry.
●Blurring may occur more often when touch shutter is used to shoot, depending on
shooting conditions. Hold the camera still when shooting.
The AF frame is displayed in orange, and the camera does not focus
when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
●To display AF frames in green and focus the camera correctly, try composing the
shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter
button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.
Subjects in shots look too dark.
●Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (=
75).
●Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (=
61).
●Correct it with the Auto Lighting Optimizer (=
64).
●Use AE lock or spot metering (=
61, =
62).
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
●Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (=
36).
●Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (=
61).
●Shoot with the AE lock or spot metering (=
61, =
62).
●Reduce the lighting on subjects.
Shots look too dark despite the ash ring (=
38).
●Shoot within ash range (=
196).
●Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash
output level (=
76, =
85).
●Increase the ISO speed (=
62).
Subjects in ash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
●Shoot within ash range (=
196).
●Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (=
36).
●Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash
output level (=
76, =
85).
White spots appear in ash shots.
●This is caused by light from the ash reecting off dust or airborne particles.
Shots look grainy.
●Lower the ISO speed (=
62).
●High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (=
51).
Shooting
Cannot shoot.
●Pictures cannot be taken unless the focus is right. Press the shutter button
halfway to focus on subjects. Once the frame is colored green, you can take the
picture.
●In Playback mode (=
93), press the shutter button halfway (=
28).
Strange display on the screen under low light (=
30).
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
●Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images, but are
recorded in movies.
- The screen may icker and horizontal banding may appear under uorescent
or LED lighting.
[] ashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting
is not possible (=
38).
[] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (=
38).
●Use the Image Stabilizer when shooting (=
78).
●Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (=
75).
●Increase the ISO speed (=
62).
●Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally,
the Image Stabilizer should not be used with a tripod or other means to secure
the camera (=
78).
Shots are out of focus.
●Use autofocus (AF) to shoot.
●Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the
way down to shoot (=
28).
●The camera will not go into focus if you are closer than the minimum focusing
distance of the lens. Check the lens you are using for its minimum focusing
distance. The lens minimum focusing distance is measured from the [ ] (focal
plane) mark on the top of the camera to the subject.
●Set [AF-assist Beam (LED) ring] to [0:Enable] (=
88).
●Conrm that unneeded functions, such as Manual Focus, are deactivated.
●Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (=
70, =
71).
170
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Shooting Movies
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
●Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports
high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the
length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time.
A “full buffer” warning (=
174) is displayed and shooting stops
automatically.
●The camera’s internal memory buffer lled up as the camera could not record to
the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.
- Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (=
138).
- Lower the image quality (=
45).
- Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording.
Subjects look distorted.
●Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a
malfunction.
Movie seems to stop momentarily.
●With some lenses, the movie is recorded in such a way that the image appears to
drop a frame at moments when the brightness changes signicantly.
Playback
Playback is not possible.
●Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename
les or alter the folder structure.
Playback stops, or audio skips.
●Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
camera (=
138).
●There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards
that have slow read speeds.
●When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may
skip if computer performance is inadequate.
Sound is not played during movies.
●Adjust the volume (=
93) if the sound in the movie is faint.
●No sound is played for movies shot in [ ] mode (=
55) because audio is not
recorded in this mode.
There is linear noise or a moiré pattern in the image
●Depending on the subject, linear noise or a moiré pattern may appear in the
image.
This can occur especially in - the following conditions.
- Subjects with ne horizontal stripes or checkered patterns, etc.
- When there are strong light sources such as sunlight or illumination in or close
to the shooting screen.
In these situations, noise and moiré patterns can be reduced by taking the
following actions.
- Change the shooting range or zoom factor, or resize the subject.
- Recompose the shot so that strong light sources do not enter the shooting
screen.
- Attach a hood to the lens so that strong light sources do not enter the lens.
●If you shift or tilt the lens when using a TS-E lens, linear noise or a moiré pattern
may be recorded in the image.
Subjects are affected by red-eye.
●Set [Red-eye reduc.] to [On] (=
47). The red-eye reduction lamp (=
3)
will be activated in ash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye
reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at
closer range.
●Edit images using red-eye correction (=
112).
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is
slower.
●Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (=
138).
Continuous shooting suddenly stops.
●To protect the camera, continuous shooting will stop after 1000 pictures in a
single shot. Release your nger from the shutter button once, and resume
shooting.
Shooting settings or the quick setting menu is not available.
●Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in
Each Shooting Mode”, “Quick Settings”, “Shooting Tabs”, “C.Fn Tab”, “INFO.
Quick Control”, and “Set UP Tab” (=
177 – =
187).
Touch AF or Touch Shutter does not work.
●Touch AF or Touch Shutter will not work if you touch the edges of the screen.
Touch closer to the center of the screen.
171
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●The write-protect tab of the memory card in the destination camera is set to the
locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.
●RAW images cannot be imported to the camera or displayed on a TV set. If you
select a RAW image on the smartphone, it is imported as a JPEG le. Send RAW
images using Image Sync.
●Images are not sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you
move or rename image les or folders on the computer that received images sent
using Image Sync via an access point (=
131). Before moving or renaming
these image les or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already
been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.
Cannot resize images for sending.
●Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the resolution setting of their original
size.
●Movies cannot be resized.
Images take a long time to send/The wireless connection is disrupted.
●Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to [ ] or
[] to reduce sending time (=
131).
●Movies may take a long time to send.
●Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4
GHz band. Note that images may take a long time to send even when [ ] is
displayed.
●Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or giving it to someone else.
●Reset the Wi-Fi settings (=
136).
Computer
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
●When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the
transfer speed as follows.
- Press the [ ] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [ ] button
down as you press the [ ] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next
screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then press the [ ] button.
Wi-Fi
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the [ ] button.
●The Wi-Fi menu is not available in Shooting mode. Switch to Playback mode and
try again.
●In Playback mode, the Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during magnied display
or index display. Switch to single-image display and try again. Similarly, the Wi-Fi
menu cannot be accessed during ltered image display according to specied
conditions. Cancel ltered image playback.
●The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer.
Disconnect the cable.
Cannot add a device/destination.
●A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase
unneeded connection information from the camera rst, and then add new
devices/destinations (=
135).
●Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (=
122).
●To add a smartphone, rst install the dedicated application on your smartphone
(=
116).
●Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4
GHz band.
●Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Cannot connect to the access point.
●Conrm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the
camera (=
194). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to
specify a supported channel manually.
Cannot send images.
●The destination device has insufcient storage space. Increase the storage space
on the destination device and resend the images.
172
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Cannot magnify!/Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/
Unselectable image.
●The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or
already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that
starred (*) functions are not available for movies.
Magnify (=
100)*, Rotation (=
107)*, Rating (=
108), Editing (=
109)*,
Print List (=
164)*, Photobook Set-up (=
166)*
Invalid selection range
●When specifying a range for image selection (=
103, =
106, =
165), you
attempted to choose an initial image that was after the nal image, or vice-versa.
Exceeded selection limit
●More than 998 images were selected for Print List (=
164) or Photobook Set-up
(=
166). Choose 998 images or less.
●Print List (=
164) or Photobook Set-up (=
166) settings could not be saved
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
●You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (=
102), Erase
(=
105), Rating (=
108), Print List (=
164), or Photobook Set-up (=
166).
Naming error!
●The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the
highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been
reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders
has been reached. Either format the memory card (=
138) or go to the menu
(=
32), select the [ 1] tab, and change [File No.] to [Auto Reset] (=
137).
Lens Error
●Communication between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the lens contacts
and t correctly on the camera.
●Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
A camera error was detected (error number)
●If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not
have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
●Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support
Help Desk.
File Error
●Correct printing (=
160) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is
connected to the printer.
On-screen Messages
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
Capture or Playback
No memory card
●The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory
card facing the correct way (=
17).
Memory card locked
●The write-protect tab of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch the
write-protect tab to the unlocked position (=
17).
Cannot record!
●Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
memory card facing the correct way (=
17).
Memory card error (=
138)
●If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a
supported memory card (=
2) and have inserted it facing the correct way
(=
17), contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Insufcient space on card
●There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (=
35, =
48,
=
60) or edit images (=
109). Either erase unneeded images (=
105) or
insert a memory card with enough free space (=
17).
Touch AF canceled
●The subject selected for Touch AF can no longer be detected (=
71).
Charge the battery (=
16)
No Image.
●The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
Protected! (=
102)
Unidentied Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back
MOV/Cannot play back MP4
●Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
●It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a
computer, or images shot with another camera.
173
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Receiving failed
Insufcient space on card
●There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to
receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a
memory card with sufcient space.
Receiving failed
Memory card locked
●The write-protect tab of the memory card in the camera to receive the images is
set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.
Receiving failed
Naming error!
●When the highest folder number (999) and the highest image number (9999)
have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.
Insufcient space on server
●Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create
space.
●Save the images sent via Image Sync (=
131) to your computer.
Check network settings
●Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current
network settings.
Print error
●Check the paper size setting (=
162). If this error message is displayed when
the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera
again.
Ink absorber full
●Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink
absorber replacement.
Wi-Fi
Connection failed
●No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (=
120).
●A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the
connection.
●Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.
Cannot determine access point
●The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try
reconnecting again.
No access points found
●Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.
●When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the
correct SSID.
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings
●Check the access point security settings (=
119).
IP address conict
●Reset the IP address so that it does not conict with another.
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed
●You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.
●Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth
devices, and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.
●Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
●Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.
Sending failed
Memory card error
●If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help
Desk.
174
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
(13) Battery level (=
174)
(14) Still image quality (compression,
resolution) (=
43)
(15) Recordable shots
(16) Maximum burst
(17) Movie quality (resolution, frame
rate) (=
45)
(18) Remaining time
(19) Histogram (=
96)
(20) Quick setting menu (=
31)
(21) Manual focus (=
74)
(22) Grid lines (=
30)
(23) AF frame (=
69)
(24) AE Point frame (=
62)
(25) Self-timer (=
40)
(26) Electronic level (=
46)
(27) Magnify (=
74)
(28) AE lock (=
61)
(29) Shutter speed (=
82)
(30) Aperture value (=
83)
(31) Exposure compensation (=
61)
(32) Highlight tone priority (=
64)
(33) ISO speed (=
62)
(34) Buffer warning (=
170)
(35) Camera shake warning (=
38)
(36) Recording mode (=
59)
(37) Attenuator (=
59)
(38) Wind filter (=
59)
(39) Time zone (=
141)
(40) Eco mode (=
139)
(41) AE lock (movie) (=
58)
(42) AF/MF toggle (=
57)
(43) Movie Servo AF (=
57)
Battery Level
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
Display Details
Sufcient charge
Slightly depleted, but sufcient.
(Blinking red) Nearly depleted. Recharge the battery.
[Charge the battery] No charge left. Recharge the battery
immediately.
On-screen Information
During Shooting
(1) Shooting mode (=
177), Scene
icon (=
39)
(2) Flash mode (=
75), LED light
(=
155)
(3) Flash exposure compensation
/ Flash output level (=
76,
=
85)
(4) Metering mode (=
62)
(5) High ISO speed NR(=
80)
(6) Continuous shooting (=
42)
(7) Picture Style (=
67)
(8) AEB (=
63)
(9) Auto Lighting Optimizer (=
64)
(10) White balance (=
65)
(11) White balance correction
(=
66)
(12) Touch Shutter (=
41)
175
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Info Display 2
(1) Shooting date/time
(2) Histogram
(3) Shooting mode
(4) Shutter speed
(5) Aperture value
(6) Exposure compensation
(7) ISO speed
(8) Highlight tone priority
(9) White balance
(10) White balance correction
(11) Picture Style settings
(12) Flash exposure compensation
(13) Metering mode
(14) Auto Lighting Optimizer
(15) Red-eye correction
(16) Image quality*
(17) Resolution
(18) Image size
* Cropped images have [ ] displayed.
Info Display 3
Shows the lens name, focal distance, and an RGB histogram. The screen
may not be wide enough to display the full name of the lens. The display
on the top of the screen is the same as Info Display 2.
Info Display 4
Displays Picture Style data. The display on the top of the screen is the
same as Info Display 2.
Playback
Info Display 1
(1) Image shown/number of target
images
(2) Battery level
(3) Wi-Fi status
(4) Settings can be applied to [ ]
mode
(5) Sent to Image Sync
(6) Edited*1
(7) Rating
(8) Protect
(9) Folder number - File number
(10) Shutter speed
(11) Aperture value
(12) Exposure compensation level
(13) ISO speed
(14) Highlight tone priority
(15) Image quality*2
*1 Displayed on images that have Creative Filter, resize, cropping, or red-eye
correction applied to them.
*2 Cropped images have [ ] displayed.
176
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the
previous or next clip) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
●To switch frames, touch the scrollbar or drag left or right.
Info Display 5
Displays noise-reduction settings for long exposure and high-speed
shooting. The display on the top of the screen is the same as Info Display
2.
Info Display 6
Displays lens correction data, peripheral illumination, and chromatic
aberration data. The display on the top of the screen is the same as Info
Display 2.
Summary of Movie Control Panel
The following operations are available on the movie control panel shown
in [View] (=
93).
Playback
Slow Motion (Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the playback
speed. No sound is played.)
(To adjust the playback speed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial. No sound is played.)
Skip Backward* or Previous Clip (=
114) (To continue skipping
backward, keep touching the [ ] button.)
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [ ]
button.)
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Skip Forward* or Next Clip (=
114) (To continue skipping
forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie is selected (=
114))
Edit (=
113)
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible
printer (=
160).
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
177
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Functions and Menu Tables
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Shooting Mode
Function
Exposure compensation (=
61)
OOOOO
– – *1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
–
ISO speed (=
62)
AUTO *2
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
100 – 6400 *2
OOOO
––––––––––––––––––
O
8000, 10000, 12800 *2
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––––
Flash (=
75)
Auto *2 – – –
OOOOO
–
O
–
O
– –
OOOOOOO
– –
On *2
OOOO
– –
O O
–
O
–
O O
–
OOOOOOO
– –
Slow Synchro *2 –
O
–
O
*3 *3
O
––––*3–––––––––––
Off *2
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
External Flash Firing (=
154) *2
OOOOOOOO
–
O
–
O O
–
OOOOOOO
– –
Flash Exposure Compensation (=
76) *2
OOOO
––*4––––––––––––––––
Flash Output (=
85) *2
OOO
––––––––––––––––––––
Aperture value (=
83) *2
O O
––––––––––––––––––––
O
Shutter speed (=
82) *2
O
–
O
–––––––––––––––––––
O
Bulb Exposures (=
85) *2
O
––––––––––––––––––––––
Program Shift (=
62) *2 – – –
O
–––––––––––––––––––
178
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Function
AE Lock (=
58, =
61), FE Lock (=
76) *2
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––*5*5
AE Lock when shooting movies, Exposure
Compensation (=
58) *2
OOOO
–––
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
*5
Manual Focus (=
74)*6*2
OOOO
– –
OOOO
–
OOOOOOOOOOOO
Manual Focus Switching when Shooting Movies
(=
57) *2
OOOO
– –
OOOO
–
OOOOOOOOOOOO
Move AF Frame (=
71) *2
OOOO
– –
OOOOOOOO
–
O O
–––
OOO
Touch AF (=
71) *2
OOOOOOOOOOOOOO
–
O O
–––
OOO
Face Select (=
71) *2
OOOOOOOOOOOOOO
–
O O
–
OOOOO
Magnied Display (=
74) *2
OOOO
– –
OOOOO
–
O
––––––––––
Touch Shutter (=
41) *2
OOOOOOOOOOOOOO
*7
O O
–
OOO
– –
Single Frame Shoot when shooting movies
(=
58)*8*2
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
–
OOOOO
Change Display
(=
30, =
61)
Custom display 1/
Custom display 2/
No info display
*2
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
INFO. Quick Control *2
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––
O O
*1 Set using [Brightness].
*2 Adjustable content depends on added shooting modes.
*3 Not selectable. However, switches to [ ] in some cases.
*4 Geared to [Brightness] setting.
*5 AE Lock only.
*6 Manual Focus when switched to MF using switch on EF lens or EF-S lens.
*7 Shooting only. Subject cannot be specied.
*8 Stills are shot with the same aspect ratio as movies.
O
Selectable or set automatically. – Not selectable.
179
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Quick Settings
Shooting Mode
Function
AF method (=
69)
*1
OOOOOO
*2
OOOOOOO
–
O O
–
OOOOO
*1
OOOO
– – *2
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
AF operation (=
72)
*1
OOOOOO
*2
OOO
–
OOOOOOOOOOOO
*1
OOOO
– – *2 – – –
O
– –
O
–
O O
–
O
–
O
– –
Image quality (=
43) See “Shooting Tabs” (=
181).
Movie
rec. size
(=
45)
When set to
[NTSC]
/*1
OOOOOO
*3
OOOOOOOOOO
–
OOOOO
/*1
OOOOOO
*3
OOOOOOOOOO
*4
OOOOO
When set to
[PAL]
*1
OOOOOO
*3
OOOOOOOOOO
–
OOOOO
/*1
OOOOOO
*3
OOOOOOOOOO
*4
OOOOO
Drive Mode (=
42)
*1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
*1
OOOOO
– –
OOOO
–
O
––––––––
O O
Self-timer/Remote ctrl
(=
40)
*1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
/ / *1
OOOOOO
–
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
White balance (=
65)
*1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
/ / / /
/*1
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––
O O
*1
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––––
WB Correciton (=
66) *1
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––
O O
180
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Function
Picture Style (=
67)
*1
OOOOOO
–
OOOO
–
O
––––––––
O O
*1
OOOO
– –
O
––––
O
–
OOOOOOOOOO
/ /
/ /
/ / *1
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––
O O
*1
OOOO
––*5––––––––––––––
O O
Auto Lighting Optimizer
(=
64)
*1
OOOO
– –
O
––––
O
–
OOOOOOOOOO
/*1
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––
O O
*1
OOOOOO
–
OOOO
–
O
––––––––
O O
Metering mode (=
62)
*1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
/ / *1
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––––
Still Image Aspect Ratio
(=
45)
*1
OOOOOO
*6
OOOOOOOOOO
–
OOO
– –
/*1
OOOOO
– *6
OOOOOOOOOOOOOO
*7 *7
*1
OOOOO
– *6
OOOOOOOOOO
–
OOO
– –
*1 Adjustable content depends on added shooting modes.
*2 Set using menu tab [ 2].
*3 Set using menu tab [ 5].
*4 Synchronizes with aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (=
55).
*5 If [Monochrome] is set to anything other than [ ], it is set automatically.
*6 Set using menu tab [ 1].
*7 Set automatically, geared to aspect ratio of movie rec. size.
O
Selectable or set automatically. – Not selectable.
181
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Shooting Tabs
Shooting Mode
Function
1
Image quality (=
43)
JPEG
– *1
OOOOO
– –
O
– –
O
––––––––––
O O
*1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
/ / /
/ /
/
*1
OOOOO
–
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
RAW
– *1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
*1
OOOOO
– –
O
– –
O
––––––––––
O O
Still Image Aspect Ratio (=
45) See “Quick Settings” (=
179).
Shooting information display (=
87) *1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
Reverse Disp. (=
29) On/Off *1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
Image review (=
47)*2
Off/2 sec./
4 sec./
8 sec./Hold
*1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
Touch Shutter (=
41)
Enable *1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
–
OOO
– –
Disable *1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
Display Mode (=
153)*3
Power
Saving *1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
Smooth *1
OOOOO
––––––––––––––––––
182
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Function
2
AF operation (=
72) See “Quick Settings” (=
179).
AF method (=
69) See “Quick Settings” (=
179).
Continuous AF (=
73)
On *1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
Off *1
OOOOOOOOOO
–
OOOOOOOOOO
– –
AF+MF (=
73)
On *1
OOOO
– –
OOOO
–
OOOOOOOOOOOO
Off *1
OOOO
– –
OOOO
–
OOOOOOOOOOOO
MF Peaking Settings (=
74) *1
OOOO
– –
OOOO
–
OOOOOOOOOOOO
IS Settings
(=
78)
IS Mode*4
Off *1
OOOO
–
OOOOOO
–
OOOOOOOOOOO
Continuous *1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
Dynamic
IS*5
1 *1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
–
OOOOO
2 *1
OOOOOOOOOOO
–
OOOOOOOOOOO
Lens aberration correction (=
79) *1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
183
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Function
3*6
AEB (=
63) *1
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––––
ISO speed
(=
62)
ISO Speed See “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode” (=
177).
ISO Auto *1
OOOO
––––––––––––––––––
O
Highlight tone priority (=
64) *1
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––
O O
Auto Lighting Optimizer (=
64) See “Quick Settings” (=
179).
Metering mode (=
62) See “Quick Settings” (=
179).
Flash Control
Flash ring (=
75) Refer to “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode” (=
177).
E-TTL II meter.
(=
77)
Evaluative/
Average *1
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––––
Red-eye reduc.
(=
47) On/Off *1
OOOOOOOO
–
O
–
O O
–
OOOOOOO
– –
Built-in ash settings
Flash Mode
(=
85)
E-TTL II *1
OOOOOOOO
–
O
–
O O
–
OOOOOOO
– –
Manual ash
*1
OOO
––––––––––––––––––––
Shutter
Sync.
(=
77)
1st curtain *1
OOOOOOOO
–
O
–
O O
–
OOOOOOO
– –
2nd curtain *1
OOOO
– –
O
––––––––––––––––
exp. comp. See “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode” (=
177).
External ash func. setting
(=
155) *1
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––––
External ash C.Fn setting
(=
156) *1
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––––
Clear settings (=
77, =
157) *1
OOOO
––*7––––––––––––––––
184
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Function
4*8
Custom White Balance (=
65) *1
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––
O O
WB Correction (=
66) See “Quick Settings” (=
179).
Picture Style (=
67) See “Quick Settings” (=
179).
High ISO speed NR
(=
80)
Standard *1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
Disable/
Low/High/
Multi Shot
Noise
Reduction
*1
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––––
Long exp. noise
reduction (=
81)
Disable *1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
Auto/Enable *1
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––––
Digest Type (=
37)
Include
Stills/No
Stills
––––––
O
–––––––––––––––––
AF auto switch (=
40)
Enable – – – – –
O
––––––––––––––––––
Disable
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
Keep setting (=
48) Disable/
Enable –––––––
O
––––––––––––––––
185
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Function
5
Movie rec. size (=
45) See “Quick Settings” (=
179).
Sound Recording (=
59)
Sound recording
Auto/Enable *1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
–
OOOOO
Manual *1
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––
O O
Disable *1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
Rec. level *1
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––
O O
Wind lter/
Attenuator
Wind Filter
Auto *1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
–
OOOOO
Off *1
OOOO
–––––––––––––
O
–––
O O
Attenuator
Off *1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
On *1
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––
O O
Movie Servo AF
(=
57)
Enable *1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
–
OOOOO
Disable *1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
AF w/ shutter button
during (=
58)
ONE SHOT/
Disable *1
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
*1 Adjustable content depends on added shooting modes.
*2 Locked at [OFF] when [ ] and [ ] are both selected.
*3 Only displayed when the Electronic Viewnder is attached.
*4 Not displayed when using EF lens, EF-S lens or EF-M lens without image
stabilization.
*5 Only displayed when using a lens that supports dynamic image stabilization.
*6 In [ ] mode, items from the [ 5] tab are shown on the [ 3] tab.
*7 [Clear built-in ash set.] only.
*8 In [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] and [ ] modes,
items from the [ 5] tab are shown on the [ 4] tab.
O
Selectable or set automatically. – Not selectable.
186
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
C.Fn Tab
Shooting Mode
Function
C.Fn I:
Exposure
(=
88)
ISO
expansion
0:Off *
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
1:On *
OOOO
––––––––––––––––––
O
Safety shift
0:Off *
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
1:On * –
O O
––––––––––––––––––––
C.Fn II:
Autofocus
(=
88)
AF-assist
beam (LED)
ring
0:Enable *
OOOOO
–
OOOO
–
OOOOOOOOOOOO
1:Disable *
OOOO
–
O
––––
O
––––––––––
O O
C.Fn III:
Others
(=
88)
Custom
Controls
Shutter/AE lock *
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––
O O
Dials *
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––
O O
M-Fn button *
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––
O O
button *
OOOO
–––––––––––– –––––
O O
button *
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––––
Release
shutter w/o
lens
0:Disable *
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
1:Enable *
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––
O O
Retract lens
on power off
0:Enable *
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
1:Disable *
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––
O O
Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn) (=
89) *
OOOO
–––––––––––––––––
O O
* Adjustable content depends on added shooting modes.
O
Selectable or set automatically. – Not selectable.
187
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Set Up Tab
Tab Item Ref. Page
1
Create Folder =
137
File Numbering =
137
Format =
138
Video system =
139
Display Control *1=
154
Electronic Level =
46
2
Eco Mode =
139
Power Saving =
28
LCD Brightness =
140
Time Zone =
141
Date/Time =
141
Language =
141
3
Beep =
142
Hints & Tips =
142
Touch Operation =
142
Sensor cleaning =
142
4
Wi-Fi Settings =
115
Certication Logo Display =
144
Custom shooting mode (C) *2=
90
Copyright Info =
144
Clear all camera settings *3=
145
Firmware Ver.: *.*.* *4=
145
*1 Only displayed when an electronic viewnder is installed.
*2 Only available in [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] mode.
*3 Not available in [ ] mode.
*4 Only available in [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] mode.
INFO. Quick Control
The Adjusting Shooting Functions from a Single Screen (=
61) is not
displayed in [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ],
[ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes.
Shooting Mode
Function
Movie Mode – – – – –
O O
Shutter speed *
O
–
O
– –
O
Aperture value *
O O
–––
O
ISO speed *
OOOO
–
O
AEB *
OOOO
– –
Flash exposure compensation *
OOOO
– –
Flash ring *
OOOO
– –
Sound recording – – – – –
O O
Picture Style *
OOOOOO
White balance *
OOOOOO
WB Correction *
OOOOOO
Auto Lighting Optimizer *
OOOOOO
Function Assignment *
OOOOOO
Metering mode *
OOOO
– –
Drive Mode *
OOOO
– –
Wind Filter – – – – –
O O
Attenuator – – – – –
O O
Self-timer/Remote ctrl *
OOOOOO
Movie rec. size *
OOOOOO
Image quality *
OOOOOO
O
Selectable or set automatically. – Not selectable.
* Adjustable content depends on added shooting modes.
188
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Playback Mode Quick Settings
Item Ref. Page
Protect =
102
Rotate =
107
Rating =
108
Image Search =
98
Play Movie =
94
Play Linked Digest Movie =
96
Print =
160
Resize =
109
Cropping =
110
Creative lters =
111
Apply settings to =
50
My Menu Tab
Tabs Item Ref. Page
1My Menu settings =
91
Playback Tab
Tabs Item Ref. Page
1
Protect =
102
Rotate =
107
Erase =
105
Rating =
108
Slideshow =
101
List/Play Digest Movies =
96
Image Search =
98
2
Creative lters =
111
Resize =
109
Cropping =
110
Red-Eye Correction =
112
Print settings =
161
Photobook Set-up =
166
3
Transition Effect =
94
Index Effect =
97
Scroll Display =
94
Auto Rotate =
108
Resume =
94
4
Playback information display =
95
Magnify (approx.) =
100
189
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
●Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases lubricant
from the camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor.
If visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor cleaning, having
the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
●Periodically cleaning the camera’s body and lens mount with a soft
lens cleaning cloth is recommended.
Handling Precautions
●The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
subjecting it to strong impact.
●Never leave the camera near anything that has a strong magnetic eld
such as a magnet or electric motor. Strong magnetic elds can cause
camera malfunction or image data loss.
●If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with
a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply
force.
●Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera
or screen.
●Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difcult,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
●If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,
condensation may form on the camera. To prevent condensation, rst
put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to the warmer
temperature before taking it out of the bag.
●Store the battery inside a sealed plastic bag or other protective
covering. To preserve battery function, if it is not used for long periods
of time, recharge around once per year, then use up the charge
completely before placing in storage.
●If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.
Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove the
lens, battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has
evaporated before resuming use.
●Do not touch the camera or lens contacts. Doing so may lead to
camera malfunction.
●The image sensor is visible after the lens is removed. Do not touch the
image sensor, as this may lead to scratching.
●Do not block the shutter operation with your nger, etc. Doing so may
cause a malfunction.
●After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the lens with the
rear end up and attach the lens caps to avoid scratching the lens
surface and contacts.
190
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Recording System
Recording
format Design rule for Camera File System (DCF) 2.0
Image type JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon original) RAW+JPEG
Simultaneous recording possible
Resolution
L (Large): Approx. 24 megapixels (6000 x
4000)
M (Medium): Approx. 12.40 megapixels
(4320 x 2880)
S1 (Small 1): Approx. 5.50 megapixels (2880
x 1920)
S2 (Small 2): Approx. 3.50 megapixels (2304
x 1536)
S3 (Small 3): Approx. 350,000 pixels (720 x
480)
RAW: Approx. 24 megapixels (6000 x
4000)
Specications
Type
Type Digital single-lens non-reex AF/AE camera
Recording
media
SD memory card, SDHC memory card, SDXC
memory card
* Compatible with UHS-I
Image sensor
size Approx. 22.3 × 14.9 mm
Compatible
lenses
Canon EF-M, EF*, and EF-S* lenses
* Mount Adapter EF-EOS M required.
(35mm lm equivalent focal length is approx. 1.6
times the lens focal length)
Lens mount Canon EF-M mount
Image Sensor
Type CMOS sensor
Effective pixels Approx. 24.2 million pixels
Total pixels Approx. 24.7 million pixels
Aspect ratio 3:2
Dust cleaning
feature
Automatically or manually executed when turned
on/off
191
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Exposure Control
Metering modes
Real-time metering with image sensor
Evaluative metering (384 zones),
Partial metering (approx. 10 % of shooting
screen),
Spot metering (approx. 2 % of shooting screen),
Center Weighted Avg.
Brightness
metering range EV 1 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Exposure control Program AE, Shutter priority AE, Aperture
priority AE, Manual exposure
ISO speed
(Recommended
exposure index)
Manually set ISO 100 – 12800, equivalent to
25600 when expanded
Automatic setting possible
Exposure
compensation
Manual: ± 3 stops in 1/3-stop increments
AEB: ± 2 stops in 1/3-stop increments (can be
combined with manual exposure compensation)
AE lock
Auto: Applied in One-Shot AF with evaluative
metering when focus is achieved
Manual: With AE lock button
Image Processing during Shooting
Picture Style Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Neutral,
Faithful, Monochrome, User Def. 1 - 3
White balance
Auto, Preset (Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten
light, White uorescent light, Flash), Custom white
balance correction feature available
*Flash color temperature information transmission
enabled
Noise reduction Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed
shots
Automatic
image
brightness
correction
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Highlight tone
priority Provided
Lens aberration
correction Peripheral illumin., Chromatic aberration
Autofocus
Type Hybrid CMOS AF III method (1-point AF, face +
tracking priority AF)
AF points 49 points (Max.)
Focusing
brightness
range
EV 2 - 18 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
AF operation One-Shot AF, Servo AF
AF-assist beam Built-in (LED lamp)
192
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Still Photo Shooting
Aspect ratio
settings 3:2, 4:3, 16:9, 1:1
Focus mode AF, MF (manual focusing, approx. 5x / 10x
magnication possible), AF+MF
Continuous AF Provided
Touch shutter Provided
Grid display Two types
Creative Filters Included as a shooting mode
Depth-of-eld
preview Provided
Movie Shooting Settings
Recording
System MP4
Movie MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Variable (average) bit rate
Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC
Recording size
and frame rate
1920x1080 (Full HD): 29.97fps (NTSC) /
23.98fps* (NTSC) / 25.00fps (PAL)
1280x720 (HD): 59.94fps (NTSC) / 50.00fps
(PAL)
640x480 (SD): 29.97fps (NTSC) / 25.00fps (PAL)
*The actual frame rate is; 23.976fps
File size
1920 x 1080 (29.97 fps/23.98 fps/25.00 fps):
172.6 MB/min.
1280 x 720 (59.94 fps/50.00 fps): 115.4 MB/min.
640 x 480 (29.97 fps/25.00 fps): 22.4 MB/min.
Focusing
Hybrid CMOS AF III method* (1-point AF, face +
tracking priority AF)
Manual focus
*Focusing brightness range: EV 2 - 18 (at room
temperature, ISO 100)
Focus mode AF, MF (manual focusing), AF+MF
Metering modes Evaluative
Shutter
Type Electronically controlled, focal-plane shutter
Shutter speed
1/4000 sec. to 30 sec. (Total shutter speed range;
available range varies by shooting mode), Bulb,
X-sync at 1/200 sec.
Flash
Built-in Flash
Retracting, manual pop-up ash
Guide number approx. 5 (ISO 100/m)
Supports angle of view equivalent to focal length
of approx. 18 mm (35mm lm equivalent: approx.
29 mm)
Recharging time approx. 3 sec.
External ash EX-series Speedlites (Flash functions can be set
with the camera)
Flash metering
mode E-TTL II autoash
Flash exposure
compensation ±2 stops in 1/3-stop increments
FE lock Provided
PC terminal None
Drive, Self-timer System
Drive mode Single shooting, continuous shooting
Continuous
shooting speed Max. 4.2 fps
Max. burst
JPEG: Approx. 1000 images
RAW: Approx. 5 images
RAW+ JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 4 images
*Measured by Canon testing standards (ISO 100,
Picture Style: using standard settings), using a
16 GB UHS-I memory card, which complies with
Canon testing standards.
Self-timer
mode
Off/2-second self-timer/10-second self-timer/
Remote control
193
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Playback
Image display
formats
Single image display, Single image + Info display
(Basic info, shooting info, histogram, lens info,
Picture Style, noise reduction, and correction
data), image index (6/12/42/110), image rotate
possible
Zoom
magnication Approx. 1.5x - 10x
Highlight alert Overexposed highlights blink
Image browsing
methods
Single image, jump by 10 or 100 images, lter
images (by shooting date, by people, by movies,
by stills, by rating), Scroll Display
Image rotate Provided
Rating Provided
Movie playback Enabled (LCD monitor, HDMI OUT) Built-in
speaker
Protect images Provided
Slideshow All images/Filter images by image search
Transition effect: Off/Fade
Post-processing of Images
Possible only with images taken with the same model
Creative lters
Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Art bold
effect, Water painting effect, Toy camera effect,
Miniature effect
Resize Provided
Red-Eye
Correction Provided
Servo AF Provided
Brightness
metering range EV 1 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Exposure
control Program AE for movies and manual exposure
Exposure
compensation ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments
ISO speed
(Recommended
exposure index)
With automatic exposure: ISO 100 - 3200 (Full
HD) / ISO 100 - 6400 (HD/SD) set automatically
With manual exposure: ISO 100 - 3200 (Full
HD) / ISO 100 - 6400 (HD/SD) set automatically/
manually, H (ISO 6400 (Full HD) / ISO 12800
(HD/SD) equivalent) speed possible
Miniature effect
movie Provided
Sound recording
Built-in stereo microphone
External stereo microphone terminal provided
Audio recording level adjustable, wind lter
(for built-in microphone) provided, attenuator
provided
Grid display Two types
LCD Monitor
Type TFT color, liquid-crystal monitor
Monitor size
and dots
Wide, 7.7 cm (3.0 in.) (3:2) with approx. 1.04
million dots
Angle
adjustment Provided
Brightness
adjustment Manual (5 levels)
Interface
languages 25 languages
Hints & Tips Displayable
194
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Wi-Fi
Standards compliance IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Transmission Methods DS-SS modulation (IEEE 802.11b) OFDM
modulation (IEEE 802.11g/n)
Transmission range
Approx. 15 m (49.21 ft.)
* When connected to a smartphone
* With no obstructions between the
transmitting and receiving antennas and no
radio interference
Transmission
frequency (central
frequency)
Frequency: 2412 to 2462 MHz
Channels: 1 to 11 ch
Connection method
Infrastructure mode*, camera access point
mode, ad hoc mode
*Wi-Fi Protected Setup supported
Security
Authentication method: Open system,
Shared key, WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK
Encryption: WEP, TKIP, AES
Network Functions
Transfer images
between cameras
Transferring one image, Transferring
selected images, Transferring resized
images
Connection to
smartphones
Viewing/controlling/receiving images
using a smartphone
Sending images to a smartphone
connected via NFC
Remote control of the camera using a
smartphone.
Print from Wi-Fi printers Images to be printed can be sent to a
printer supporting Wi-Fi.
Send images to a Web
service
Images in the camera or links to images
can be sent to registered Web services.
View images using a
media player
Images can be viewed using a DLNA-
compatible media player.
Direct Printing
Type PictBridge (USB and Wireless LAN)
Printable
images
JPEG and RAW images (Can print RAW images
displayed as JPEG only with images taken with
the same model)
Print ordering DPOF Version 1.1 compatible
Custom Functions
Custom
Functions 6 types
My Menu
registration Provided
Copyright Info Entry and inclusion possible
Interface
Digital terminal PC networking for direct print (Hi-Speed USB
equivalent)
HDMI mini OUT
terminal Type C (auto-switching of resolution)
External
microphone IN
terminal
3.5 mm diameter stereo mini-jack
Wireless
remote control Compatible with Remote Controller RC-6
195
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Number of Shots per Memory Card
Using a 16 GB memory card
Image
Quality
File Size
(Approx. MB)
Recordable
Shots (Approx.)
Maximum Burst
(Approx.)
9.0 1680 1000
5.8 2612 1000
5.8 2612 1000
3.6 4152 1000
3.0 5061 1000
2.0 7592 1000
1.8 8377 1000
0.3 48592 1000
30.2 500 5
RAW +
JPEG
Total size of RAW
+ JPEG 385 4
●The values of the le size, recordable shots, and maximum burst were
measured using a Canon’s testing standard 16 GB memory card and
based on the testing standards (the aspect ratio of 3:2, ISO100, and
the picture style set to Standard). These values may vary depending
on conditions.
●The values of the maximum burst were measured using a 16 GB
UHS-I memory card.
Power Supplies
Battery
Battery Pack LP-E17 (Quantity 1)
*AC power can be supplied via AC Adapter Kit
ACK-E17
Number of
possible shots
(Based on
CIPA testing
standards)
Room temperature (23°C) Approx. 250 images /
Low temperature (0°C) Approx. 185 images
Movie shooting
time
Room temperature (23°C) Approx. 1 h 40 min. /
Low temperature (0°C) Approx. 1 h 35 min.
(When using fully charged Battery Pack LP-E17)
Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Approx. 110.9 x 68.0 x 44.4 mm (4.4 x 2.7 x 1.7 in.)
Weight
Approx. 366 g (12.9 oz.) (Based on CIPA
Guidelines: includes camera body + battery pack
+ card)
Approx. 319 g (11.3 oz.) (camera body only,
excluding the lens cap)
Operation Environment
Working
temperature
range
0°C - 40°C
Working
humidity 85% or less
196
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Internal Flash Range Guide
(approx. - m)
ISO speed When EF-M18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM is Attached
Wide-angle: f/3.5 Telephoto: f/5.6
100 0.5 - 1.4 0.5 - 0.9
200 0.5 - 2.0 0.5 - 1.3
400 0.5 - 2.9 0.5 - 1.8
800 0.7 - 4.0 0.5 - 2.5
1600 1.0 - 5.7 0.6 - 3.6
3200 1.5 - 8.1 0.9 - 5.1
6400 2.1 - 11.4 1.3 - 7.1
12800 2.9 - 16.2 1.8 - 10.1
H (equivalent to
25600) 4.1 - 22.9 2.6 - 14.3
Battery Pack LP-E17
Type Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated voltage 7.2 V DC
Battery
capacity 1040 mAh
Working
temperature
range
Charging: 5°C - 40°C
Shooting: 0°C - 40°C
Working
humidity 85% or less
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Approx. 33.0 x 14.0 x 49.4 mm (1.30 x 0.55 x 1.94
in.)
Weight Approx. 45 g (1.59 oz.) (excluding protective
cover)
Recording Time per Memory Card
Using a 16 GB memory card
Image
Quality File Size (Approx. MB) Total Recording Time (Approx.)
172.6 MB/minute 1 hour 26 minutes 5 seconds
115.4 MB/minute 2 hours 8 minutes 27 seconds
22.4 MB/minute 10 hours 22 minutes 35
seconds
●Continuous shooting is possible until either the memory card reaches
its limit or the recording time reaches 29 minutes 59 seconds.
●Recording may stop even if the limit of 29 minutes 59 seconds has not
been reached on some memory cards. SD Speed Class 4 or higher
memory cards are recommended. Faster memory cards are required
when shooting stills while recording a movie.
197
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Battery Charger LC-E17/LC-E17E
Compatible
battery Battery Pack LP-E17
Recharging
time Approx. 2 hours (at room temperature)
Rated input 100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
Rated output 8.4 V DC / 700mA
Working
temperature
range
5°C - 40°C
Working
humidity 85% or less
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Approx. 67.3 x 27.7 x 92.2 mm (2.65 x 1.09 x 3.63
in.)
Weight
LC-E17: Approx. 85 g (3.00 oz.)
LC-E17E: Approx. 80 g (2.82 oz.) (excluding
power cord)
●All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA
(Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards and
guidelines.
●Dimensions, maximum diameter, length and weight listed above are
based on CIPA Guidelines (except weight for camera body only).
●Product specications and the exterior are subject to change without
notice.
●If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera,
consult the respective lens manufacturer.
198
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Advanced Guide
Index
Index
Numbers
1-point (AF frame mode) 69
A
AC adapter kit 148, 151
Accessories 148
AEB shooting 63
AE Lock 61
AF frames 69
AF lock 71
AF-point zoom 74
Art bold effect (shooting mode)
54
Aspect ratio 45
Auto Lighting Optimizer 64
Auto mode (shooting mode) 23
AUTO mode (shooting mode) 35
Auto rotate 108
Av (shooting mode) 83
B
Batteries → Date/time (date/time
battery)
Power saving 28
Battery charger 2, 148
Battery pack
Charging 16
Eco Mode 139
Level 174
Power saving 28
Black and white images 57
BULB (Bulb exposure) 85
B/W (Monochrome) 67
C
Camera
Reset all 145
Camera access point mode 122
Camera shake 23
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 122
Charging 17
Chromatic aberration 79
Cleaning (image sensor) 142
Close-up (shooting mode) 51
Color temperature 66
Color (white balance) 65
Compression ratio 43
Contrast 68
Creative Assist (shooting mode) 48
Creative lters (shooting mode) 52
Cropping 110, 162
C (shooting mode) 88
Custom Functions 88
Custom WB 65
Custom white balance 65
D
Date/time
Changing 19
Date/time battery 19
Settings 18
World clock 141
DC coupler 151
Defaults → Clear settings
Direct printing 194
Display language 20
Display period 49
DLNA 115
DPOF 164
E
Eco Mode 139
Editing
Cropping 110
Red-eye correction 112
Resizing images 109
Editing or erasing connection
informationEditing or erasing
connection information 116
Erasing 105
Erasing all 106
Error messages 172
Exposure
AE lock 61
Compensation 61
FE lock 76
F
Face+Tracking AF 70
Faithful 67
Favorites 108
FEB 156
FE Lock 76
File numbering 137
Filter effects 68
Firmware 145
First-curtain synchronization 156
Fish-eye effect (shooting mode) 54
Flash
Flash exposure compensation 76
Flash off 75
On 75
Slow synchro 75
Flash exposure compensation 76
Flash Mode 155
Flash off 75
Focusing
AF frames 69
AF lock 71
MF peaking 74
Servo AF 72
Touch AF 71
Focusing Range
Manual focus 74
Focus lock 70
Food (shooting mode) 52
G
Grainy B/W (shooting mode) 57
Grid lines 30
H
Handheld nightscene (shooting mode)
51
HDMI cable 150
High dynamic range (shooting mode)
53
High ISO speed noise reduction 80
Household power 151
Hybrid Auto (shooting mode) 37
I
Icons 174, 175
Image dust prevention 142
Image quality → Compression ratio
(image quality)
Images
Display period 47
Erasing 105
Playback → Viewing
Protecting 102
Image stabilization 78
Image Sync 131
Index display 97
Indicator 34, 47
Installation 134, 158
ISO speed 62
199
Basic Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Advanced Guide
Index
S
Saturation 68
Saving images to a computer 132,
159
Screen
Display language 20
Icons 174, 175
Menu → Quick Setting menu,
Menu
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
→ Memory cards
Searching 98
Second-curtain synchronization 156
Self-timer 40
2-second self-timer 41
Sending images 122
Sending images to another camera
129
Sending images to a printer 132
Sending images to Web services 125
Sensor cleaning 142
Servo AF 72
Sharpness 68
Shooting
Shooting information 174
Single-image display 25
Slideshow 101
Slow synchro 75
Soft focus (shooting mode) 56
Software
Installation 158
Saving images to a computer
132, 159
Sounds 137
Sports (shooting mode) 51
Strap 16
T
Terminal 150, 151, 160
Tone priority 64
Toning effect 68
Touch AF 71
Touch screen 3
Touch shutter 41
Toy camera effect (shooting mode)
56
Traveling with the camera 141
Tripod socket 3
Troubleshooting 168
TV display 150
Tv (shooting mode) 82
V
Viewing 25
Image search 98
Index display 97
Jump to image 99
Magnied display 100
Single-image display 25
Slideshow 101
TV display 150
W
Water painting effect (shooting mode)
54
White balance (color) 65
Wi-Fi functions 115
Wireless ash shooting 155
World clock 141
Wrist strap → Strap
Z
Zoom 23
J
Jump display 99
L
Landscape 67
Landscape (shooting mode) 51
Lens 20
Lock release 21
Level 174
Long exposure noise reduction 81
M
M (shooting mode) 84
Macro photography 51
Magnied display 100
Main Dial 3
Manual focus 74
Memory cards 2
Menu
Basic operations 32
Table 177
Metering method 62
MF (manual focusing) 74
MF peaking 74
Miniature effect (shooting mode) 55
Movies
Editing 113
Image quality (resolution/frame
rate) 43
Multi Shot Noise Reduction 80
N
Neck strap → Strap
Neutral 67
Noise reduction
High ISO speed 80
Long exposure 81
Nomenclature 3
O
On 75
P
P (shooting mode) 60
Package contents 2
Peripheral illumination correction 79
Photobook set-up 166
PictBridge 150, 160
Picture Style 67
Playback → Viewing
Portrait (shooting mode) 51
Power 148 → AC adapter kit,
→ Battery charger, → Battery pack
Power saving 28
Printing 160 → Print
Program AE 60
Protecting 102
Q
Q menu → Quick Setting menu
Quick Setting menu
Basic operations 31
Table 179
R
Rating 108
RAW 43
Red-eye correction 112
Remote shooting 133
Reset all 145
Resizing images 109
Resolution (image size) 43
Rotating 107
200
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions
• The model number is PC2064 (including WLAN module model WM223).
•
-
•
-
-
• According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations, export
permission (or service transaction permission) from the Japanese
government is necessary to export strategic resources or services
(including this product) outside Japan.
• Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls under
U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported to or
brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.
• Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use.
The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be erased
due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio waves or
static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make notes of
wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that Canon accepts no
responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss of earnings resulting
from a degradation or disappearance of content.
• When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or
sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and reset
the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary.
• Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or
theft of the product.
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this product
due to loss or theft of the product.
• Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the
guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for
damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other than
as described in this guide.
•
Radio Wave Interference Precautions
• This product may receive interference from other devices that emit radio
waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far away as
possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the same time
as this product.
Security Precautions
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.
• Only use networks you are authorized to use.
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays the
results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use (unknown
networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to connect to or
using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized access. Be sure
to use only networks you are authorized to use, and do not attempt to
connect to other unknown networks.
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
• Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions and
attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
201
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1Camera Basics
2Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3Other Shooting Modes
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6Playback Mode
7Wi-Fi Functions
8Set-Up Menu
9Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
4P Mode
5Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Before Use
• The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc. in
the United States and in other countries.
• All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
• This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
• This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding
MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and
non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the
AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted
or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.
Disclaimer
• Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.
• All measurements based on Canon testing standards.
• Information subject to change without notice, as are product specications
and appearance.
• Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the actual
equipment.
• The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any loss
arising from the use of this product.
All lenses and accessories mentioned in this instruction manual are
current as of September 2014. Consult the Customer Service Center
for usage with lenses and accessories released after that date.
• Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to the
network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to
cover their tracks when inltrating other systems).
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your Wi-Fi network.
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers
via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy
to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices
directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS
over IP enables PictBridge connections in network
environments, and the camera is also compatible with
this standard.
Trademarks and Licensing
• DCF is a group trademark and Japanese registered trademark of the
Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association.
• Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
• App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
• The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
• Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Alliance®, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ are
trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.